EP4104177A1 - Verfahren zur charakterisierung von zellen unter verwendung von genexpression und chromatinzugänglichkeit - Google Patents

Verfahren zur charakterisierung von zellen unter verwendung von genexpression und chromatinzugänglichkeit

Info

Publication number
EP4104177A1
EP4104177A1 EP21711092.3A EP21711092A EP4104177A1 EP 4104177 A1 EP4104177 A1 EP 4104177A1 EP 21711092 A EP21711092 A EP 21711092A EP 4104177 A1 EP4104177 A1 EP 4104177A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
cells
cell
nucleic acid
sequence
molecules
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
EP21711092.3A
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
Arundhati Shamoni MAHESHWARI
Li Wang
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
10X Genomics Inc
Original Assignee
10X Genomics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 10X Genomics Inc filed Critical 10X Genomics Inc
Publication of EP4104177A1 publication Critical patent/EP4104177A1/de
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16B—BIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B20/00—ICT specially adapted for functional genomics or proteomics, e.g. genotype-phenotype associations
    • G16B20/30—Detection of binding sites or motifs
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6806—Preparing nucleic acids for analysis, e.g. for polymerase chain reaction [PCR] assay

Definitions

  • the present disclosure provides a method for characterizing cells or cell nuclei, comprising: providing a plurality of partitions comprising a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a plurality of particles, wherein a partition of the plurality of partitions comprises a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a particle of the plurality of particles, wherein (i) the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises a plurality of nucleic acid molecules, wherein the plurality of nucleic acid molecules comprises a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules and a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules; and (ii) the plurality of particles comprises a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled thereto, wherein a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprises a nucleic acid
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprise cell types.
  • the cell types are selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • the monocytes are selected from the group consisting of monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 14 cell surface receptors and monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 16 cell surface receptors.
  • the dendritic cells are selected from conventional dendritic cells and plasmacytoid dendritic cells.
  • the sequences corresponding to the DNA molecules of the plurality of DNA molecules correspond to regions of accessible chromatin.
  • the RNA molecules of the plurality of RNA molecules comprise messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules.
  • the sequence information comprises a first plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to the DNA molecules and a second plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to the RNA molecules.
  • the sequence information comprises a plurality of sequencing reads associated with individual cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • (d) comprises determining a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei using the sequence information, which linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus links a first data set comprising sequence information corresponding to DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a second data set comprising sequence information corresponding to RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • (d) comprises using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures and/or by regions of accessible chromatin signatures.
  • (d) comprises (i) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) using the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin.
  • (d) comprises (i) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) using the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei is derived from a sample comprising a tumor or suspected of comprising a tumor.
  • the method further comprises processing the sequence information corresponding to the RNA molecules and the DNA molecules with sequence information generated from a control sample.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid.
  • the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • the tumor is a B cell lymphoma tumor.
  • the method further comprises using the sequence information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in the sample.
  • the method further comprises (e) using the sequence information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in the sample. In some embodiments, the method further comprises, based at least in part on (e), identifying a therapeutic regimen for treatment of a subject from which the sample derives. In some embodiments, the therapeutic regimen comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in the tumor-specific gene expression pattern or the tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the plurality of partitions comprises a plurality of droplets.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises a plurality of transposed nuclei.
  • the plurality of particles comprises a plurality of gel beads.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules are releasably coupled to the plurality of particles.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules are releasable from the particles of the plurality of particles upon application of a stimulus.
  • the stimulus is a chemical stimulus.
  • the stimulus comprises a reducing agent.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules are coupled to the plurality of particles via a plurality of labile moieties.
  • the method further comprises generating the plurality of partitions using a microfluidic device.
  • the method further comprises recovering the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules from the at least the subset of the plurality of partitions.
  • the method further comprises, prior to (b), lysing or permeabilizing the plurality of cells or cell nuclei to provide access to the plurality of nucleic acid molecules therein.
  • the method further comprises, prior to (a), processing open chromatin structures of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei with a transposase to provide the plurality of DNA molecules.
  • processing open chromatin structures of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei with a transposase to provide the plurality of DNA molecules.
  • reverse transcribing the plurality of RNA molecules to provide a plurality of complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for identifying a genetic feature, comprising
  • a method for identifying a genetic feature comprising: (a) providing a first data set corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a second data set corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei, wherein the first data set comprises a first plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the regions of accessible chromatin and a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences, and wherein the second data set comprises a second plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the plurality of RNA molecules and the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences, wherein a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei corresponds to a nucleic acid barcode sequence of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences; (b) using the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences of the
  • the cell types are selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • the monocytes are selected from the group consisting of monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 14 cell surface receptors and monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 16 cell surface receptors.
  • the dendritic cells are selected from conventional dendritic cells and plasmacytoid dendritic cells.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 500 cells or cell nuclei. In some embodiments, the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 1,000 cells or cell nuclei. In some embodiments, the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 10,000 cells or cell nuclei.
  • the genetic feature is a cis-regulatory element.
  • the cis-regulatory element is a promoter.
  • the cis-regulatory element is an enhancer.
  • the expressed protein is a cytokine.
  • the plurality of RNA molecules comprises a plurality of messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules.
  • the method further comprises determining a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei using the first data set and the second data set, which linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus links a fourth data set comprising sequence information corresponding to DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a fifth data set comprising sequence information corresponding to RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • (c) comprises using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures.
  • (c) comprises using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures.
  • (c) comprises (i) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) using the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin.
  • (c) comprises (i) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) using the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) using the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei is derived from a sample comprising a tumor or suspected of comprising a tumor.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid.
  • the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • the tumor is a B cell lymphoma tumor.
  • the method further comprises using the sequence information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in the sample.
  • the method further comprises (f) using the sequence information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in the sample.
  • the method further comprises, based at least in part on (f), identifying a therapeutic regimen for treatment of a subject from which the sample derives.
  • the therapeutic regimen comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in the tumor-specific gene expression pattern or the tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the present disclosure provides a system for identifying a genetic feature, comprising: one or more databases comprising a first data set corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a second data set corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei, wherein the first data set comprises a first plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the regions of accessible chromatin and a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences, and wherein the second data set comprises a second plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the plurality of RNA molecules and the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences, wherein a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei corresponds to a nucleic acid barcode sequence
  • the cell types are selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • the monocytes are selected from the group consisting of monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 14 cell surface receptors and monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 16 cell surface receptors.
  • the dendritic cells are selected from conventional dendritic cells and plasmacytoid dendritic cells.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 500 cells or cell nuclei. In some embodiments, the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 1,000 cells or cell nuclei. In some embodiments, the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises at least 10,000 cells or cell nuclei.
  • the genetic feature is a cis-regulatory element.
  • the cis-regulatory element is a promoter.
  • the cis-regulatory element is an enhancer.
  • the expressed protein is a cytokine.
  • the plurality of RNA molecules comprises a plurality of messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to determine a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei using the first data set and the second data set, which linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus links a fourth data set comprising sequence information corresponding to DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a fifth data set comprising sequence information corresponding to RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to use the sequence information in (ii) to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures. In some embodiments, in (ii), the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to use the sequence information in (ii) to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to use the sequence information (1) to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (2) to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (3) with the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to use the sequence information (1) to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures,
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively further programmed to generate an output that relates to detecting a disease or condition in the sample, the output comprising the regions of accessible chromatin signatures and gene expression signatures, presence or absence of the disease or condition; or a level of progression of the disease or condition.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei is derived from a sample comprising a tumor or suspected of comprising a tumor.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid.
  • the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • the tumor is a B cell lymphoma tumor.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively further programmed to use the sequence information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in the sample.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively further programmed to compare the sequence information to sequence information from a control sample.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively further programmed to use the sequence information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in the sample. In some embodiments, the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively further programmed to, based at least in part on the use of the sequence information to identify the cell type, the cell state, the tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or the tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in the sample, identify a therapeutic regimen for treatment of a subject from which the sample derives.
  • the therapeutic regimen comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in the tumor-specific gene expression pattern or the tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the system is used to monitor efficacy of the therapeutic regimen for treatment.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for determining a condition of a sample, comprising: generating (i) a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the sample, (ii) a second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus, and (iii) a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus using the first data set and the second data set; using the linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus and a control linked signature of a control cell or cell nucleus of a control sample to determine one or more regions of accessible chromatin of the plurality of DNA molecules or one or more genes expressed from the plurality of RNA molecules indicative of the condition.
  • a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of
  • the method further comprises c) determining a level of the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or the one or more genes expressed determined in b) indicative of the condition in one or more samples of an individual suspected of having the condition.
  • the method further comprises providing a diagnostic evaluation of the condition, a prognostic evaluation of the condition, monitoring of the condition, and/or management of the condition.
  • a gene associated with the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or one or more genes expressed determined in b) is identified as a target of a therapeutic regimen for treatment of the condition.
  • the method further comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of an agent to a subject targeting the target, wherein the sample is derived from the subject.
  • the method further comprises determining an efficacy of the agent in the subject.
  • determining the efficacy comprises detecting a presence or absence of a response to the agent by the subject, wherein the response comprises a quantity, degree, or extent of response following administration of a first dose or a subsequent dose of the agent.
  • the response comprises a differential in gene expression and/or chromatin accessibility of the target between prior to and after administration of the agent.
  • the sample is from a subject having a tumor or suspected of having a tumor.
  • the condition is a tumor, cancer, malignancy, neoplasm, or other proliferative disease or disorder.
  • the condition is a B cell malignancy.
  • the B cell malignancy is B cell lymphoma.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid. In some embodiments, the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • a) comprises providing a plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the plurality of DNA molecules and the plurality of RNA molecules, wherein the sequencing reads each correspond to the cell or cell nucleus via a nucleic acid barcode sequence.
  • the method further comprises, prior to b), clustering a plurality of cells or cell nuclei of the sample by respective regions of accessible chromatin signatures, by respective genes expressed, and/or by respective linked signatures of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei are clustered by cell types selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • helper T cells cytotoxic T cells
  • memory T cells regulatory T cells
  • regulatory T cells natural killer T cells
  • mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells gamma delta T cells
  • effector T cells and naive T cells.
  • the method further comprises c) monitoring a level of the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or the one or more genes expressed determined in b) indicative of the condition in the individual. In some embodiments, the method further comprises, prior to step a), generating a plurality of tagged DNA fragments.
  • the method further comprises, prior to a), generating a plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules, wherein the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprises (i) a first subset comprising sequences corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of the plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus of the sample and (ii) a second subset comprising sequences corresponding to the ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprises (i) a first subset comprising sequences corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of the plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus of the sample and (ii) a second subset comprising sequences corresponding to the ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the generating is performed within a plurality of partitions.
  • the method further comprises sequencing the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules.
  • the first data set is generated by sequencing a first plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising sequences corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of the plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus of the sample; and the second data set is generated by sequencing a second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising sequences of the ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the present disclosure provides an in vitro method of preparing a biological sample, comprising: (a) processing open chromatin structures of T-cells and/or B- cells from the biological sample with a transposase to provide a plurality of DNA molecules; (b) generating a first plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising the plurality of DNA molecules processed in (a); (c) generating a second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising a plurality of nucleic acids comprising mRNA sequences or derivatives thereof from the T-cells and/or B-cells from the biological sample; and (d) generating a first and second sequencing library from the first and second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules, respectively, to determine a linked signature of a cell of the T-cells and/or B-cells.
  • step (b) and/or step (c) is performed within a plurality of partitions.
  • the method further comprises determining a significance level for the linked signature determined in step (d).
  • step (c) comprises reverse transcribing the plurality of mRNA sequences from the T-cells and/or B-cells from the biological sample to provide a plurality of complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules, and the second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprises the cDNA molecules.
  • step (c) comprises barcoding 3’ ends of the mRNA were barcoded.
  • the method further comprises encapsulating single nuclei of the T-cells and/or B-cells in droplets prior to step (b). In some embodiments, the method further comprises (e) determining from the first and second sequencing libraries a presence, absence, and/or level of the one or more linked signatures correlated with a condition.
  • the condition is a tumor, cancer, malignancy, neoplasm, or other proliferative disease or disorder. In some embodiments, the condition is a B cell malignancy. In some embodiments, the B cell malignancy is B cell lymphoma.
  • the linked signature of a cell or cell nucleus of the T-cells and/or B-cells is compared to a control linked signature of a control cell or cell nucleus of a control sample.
  • the method comprises providing the biological sample isolated and obtained from an individual.
  • the method further comprises obtaining the biological sample from the individual.
  • the method may, but need not, comprise the further step of obtaining the biological sample from the individual.
  • the method is performed ex vivo.
  • the method further comprises providing the biological sample isolated and obtained from an individual prior to step (a).
  • the present disclosure provides a system for characterizing cells, comprising: a plurality of partitions comprising a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a plurality of particles, wherein a partition of the plurality of partitions comprises a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a particle of the plurality of particles, wherein (i) the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises a plurality of nucleic acid molecules, wherein the plurality of nucleic acid molecules comprises a plurality of RNA molecules and a plurality of DNA molecules; and (ii) the plurality of particles comprises a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled thereto, wherein a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprises a nucleic acid barcode sequence of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences, and wherein the particle comprises a unique nucle
  • the characteristics of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprise cell types.
  • the cell types are selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • the monocytes are selected from the group consisting of monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 14 cell surface receptors and monocytes characterized by high level expression of CD 16 cell surface receptors.
  • the dendritic cells are selected from conventional dendritic cells and plasmacytoid dendritic cells.
  • the sequences corresponding to the DNA molecules of the plurality of DNA molecules correspond to regions of accessible chromatin.
  • the RNA molecules of the plurality of RNA molecules comprise messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules.
  • the sequence information comprises a first plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to the DNA molecules and a second plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to the RNA molecules.
  • the sequence information comprises a plurality of sequencing reads associated with individual cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to: determine a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei using the sequence information, which linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus links a first data set comprising sequence information corresponding to DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a second data set comprising sequence information corresponding to RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to: use the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures and/or by regions of accessible chromatin signatures.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to: (i) use the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) use the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) use the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to: (i) use the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by regions of accessible chromatin signatures, (ii) use the sequence information to cluster cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei by gene expression signatures, and (iii) use the sequence information and the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the regions of accessible chromatin signatures to further characterize the cells or cell nuclei clustered by the gene expression signatures.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei is derived from a sample comprising a tumor or suspected of comprising a tumor.
  • the one or more computer processors are further, individually or collectively, programmed to process the sequence information corresponding to the RNA molecules and the DNA molecules with sequence information generated from a control sample.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid.
  • the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • the tumor is a B cell lymphoma tumor.
  • the one or more computer processors are further, individually or collectively, programmed to use the sequence information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in the sample.
  • the one or more computer processors are further, individually or collectively, programmed to: (c) use the sequence information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in the sample.
  • the one or more computer processors are further, individually or collectively, programmed to, based at least in part on (c), identify a therapeutic regimen for treatment of a subject from which the sample derives.
  • the therapeutic regimen comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in the tumor-specific gene expression pattern or the tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the plurality of partitions comprises a plurality of droplets.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei comprises a plurality of transposed nuclei.
  • the plurality of particles comprises a plurality of gel beads.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules is releasably coupled to the plurality of particles.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules are releasable from the particles of the plurality of particles upon application of a stimulus.
  • the stimulus is a chemical stimulus.
  • the stimulus comprises a reducing agent.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules is coupled to the plurality of particles via a plurality of labile moieties.
  • the system further comprises a microfluidic device that generates the plurality of partitions.
  • a system for determining a condition of a sample comprises: one or more databases comprising (i) a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the sample, (ii) a second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus, and (iii) a linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus using the first data set and the second data set; one or more computer processors operably coupled to the one or more databases, wherein the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to use the linked signature of the cell or cell nucleus and a control linked signature of a control cell or cell nucleus of a control sample to determine one or more regions of accessible chromatin of the
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to determine a level of the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or the one or more genes expressed indicative of the condition in one or more samples of an individual suspected of having the condition. In some embodiments, the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to generate an output that relates to providing a diagnostic evaluation of the condition, a prognostic evaluation of the condition, monitoring of the condition, and/or management of the condition. In some embodiments, the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively configured to identify a gene associated with the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or the one or more genes expressed as a target of a therapeutic regimen for treatment of the condition.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to generate an output that relates to determining an administration regimen of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent to a subject targeting the target, wherein the sample is derived from the subject. In some embodiments, the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to generate an output that relates to determining an efficacy of an agent targeting the target when administered to a subject, wherein the sample is derived from the subject.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to generate an output that relates to detecting a presence or absence of a response to the agent by the subject, wherein the response comprises a quantity, degree, or extent of response following administration of a first dose or a subsequent dose of the agent.
  • the response comprises a differential in gene expression and/or chromatin accessibility of the target between prior to and after administration of the agent.
  • the sample is from a subject having a tumor or suspected of having a tumor.
  • the condition is a tumor, cancer, malignancy, neoplasm, or other proliferative disease or disorder.
  • the condition is a B cell malignancy.
  • the B cell malignancy is B cell lymphoma.
  • the sample is derived from a bodily fluid.
  • the sample is derived from a biopsy.
  • the first data set and the second data set comprise a plurality of sequencing reads corresponding to sequences of the plurality of DNA molecules and the plurality of RNA molecules, wherein the sequencing reads each correspond to the cell or cell nucleus via a nucleic acid barcode sequence.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to cluster a plurality of cells or cell nuclei of the sample by respective regions of accessible chromatin signatures, by respective genes expressed, and/or by respective linked signatures of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei are clustered by cell types selected from the group consisting of monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating B cells, normal B cells, and tumor B cells.
  • the B cells are selected from the group consisting of naive B cells, memory B cells, plasmablast B cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of replicating T cells and normal T cells.
  • the T cells are selected from the group consisting of helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, gamma delta T cells, effector T cells, and naive T cells.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to monitor a level of the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or the one or more genes expressed indicative of the condition in the individual.
  • the plurality of DNA fragments is tagged.
  • the first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the sample and the second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus are barcoded with barcoded nucleic acid sequences.
  • the first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the sample and the second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus are barcoded with barcoded nucleic acid sequences within a plurality of partitions.
  • the system further comprises a device or a sequencer configured to sequence the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid sequences.
  • the first data set is generated by sequencing a first plurality of barcoded nucleic acid sequences comprising sequences corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of the plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus of the sample; and the second data set is generated by sequencing a second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid sequences comprising sequences of the ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
  • RNA ribonucleic acid
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to process the first data set and/or the second data set to generate a filtered first data set and/or a filtered second data set.
  • the filtered first data set is filtered using motif enrichment.
  • the filtered second data set is filtered using differential expression analysis.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to process the first data set and/or the second data set to generate a linkage significance.
  • the one or more computer processors are individually or collectively programmed to process the first filtered data set and/or the second filtered data set to generate an enrichment score.
  • the filtered first data set and the filtered second data set is used to generate a transcription factor- target gene network.
  • a gene from the transcription factor-target gene network is identified as a target of a therapeutic regimen for treatment of the condition.
  • the target is a transcription factor.
  • Another aspect of the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer readable medium comprising machine executable code that, upon execution by one or more computer processors, implements any of the methods above or elsewhere herein.
  • the computer memory comprises machine executable code that, upon execution by the one or more computer processors, implements any of the methods above or elsewhere herein.
  • a sample may be processed for various purposes, such as identification of a type of moiety within the sample.
  • the sample may be a biological sample.
  • Biological samples may be processed, such as for detection of a disease (e.g., cancer) or identification of a particular species.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • Biological samples may be processed within various reaction environments, such as partitions.
  • Partitions may be wells or droplets.
  • Droplets or wells may be employed to process biological samples in a manner that enables the biological samples to be partitioned and processed separately.
  • droplets may be fluidically isolated from other droplets, enabling accurate control of respective environments in the droplets.
  • Biological samples in partitions may be subjected to various processes, such as chemical processes or physical processes. Samples in partitions may be subjected to heating or cooling, or chemical reactions, such as to yield species that may be qualitatively or quantitatively processed.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of a microfluidic channel structure for partitioning individual analyte carriers.
  • FIG. 2 shows an example of a microfluidic channel structure for the controlled partitioning of beads into discrete droplets.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of a barcode carrying bead.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates another example of a barcode carrying bead.
  • FIG. 5 schematically illustrates an example microwell array.
  • FIG. 6 schematically illustrates an example workflow for processing nucleic acid molecules.
  • FIG. 7 shows a computer system that is programmed or otherwise configured to implement methods provided herein.
  • FIGs. 8A and 8B show beads for use according to the methods of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a transposase-nucleic acid complex comprising a transposase, a first double-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a transposon end sequence and a first primer sequence and a second double-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a transposon end sequence and a second primer sequence.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a transposase-nucleic acid complex comprising a transposase, a first double-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a transposon end sequence and first and second primer sequences and a second double-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a transposon end sequence and third and fourth primer sequences.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a transposase-nucleic acid complex comprising a transposase, a first hairpin molecule, and a second hairpin molecule.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an exemplary scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an additional scheme for tandem ATAC ligation and RNA template switching.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a scheme for T7 mediated linear amplification.
  • FIG. 21 shows a modified workflow T7 mediated linear amplification.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a scheme for tandem ATAC and RNA processing.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a scheme for tandem ATAC and RNA processing.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates the differences between computationally inferred linkages and true single cell linkage of gene expression and open chromatin analyses.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a method to generate single cell accessible chromatin (ATAC) and gene expression libraries.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates cell clustering and annotation of cells using expressed markers.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates cell clustering and annotation of cells using chromatin accessibility (open chromatin).
  • FIG. 28 illustrates concordance between the two read-outs of FIGs. 26 and 27.
  • FIGs. 29A-29B illustrate another representative concordance between the two read outs of FIGs. 26 and 27.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates the transfer gene expression marker-derived annotation into accessible chromatin clustered populations.
  • Clustering cells from ATAC data alone using transcription factor accessibility i.e., open chromatin
  • open chromatin open chromatin
  • FIG. 31 illustrates the identification of novel populations of cells that would otherwise be unidentified and/or unannotated when analyzing either gene expression or regions of open chromatin alone.
  • populations of cells open chromatin analysis alone would show as large clusters of cells (e.g., B cells (blue), top left panel) may be annotated using gene expression markers (top right panel) to further stratify cells clustered by open chromatin (e.g., naive/memory B cells, bottom panel).
  • FIG. 32 illustrates differential gene expression in the annotated cells in FIG. 31 and the identification and differentiation of prospective naive vs. memory B cells.
  • a population of cells identified by gene expression analysis to be a single cluster is identified as two distinct clusters in the gene expression annotated open chromatin (naive/memory B cells, top left panel). Looking at differential gene expression in the gene expression annotated open chromatin reveals two distinct populations of cells (subclusterl and subcluster 2, bottom left panel) that are obscured when viewing gene expression alone (bottom right panel).
  • subcluster 1 Gene expression analysis of subclusterl and subcluster 2 identifies subcluster 1 as prospective memory B cells (relatively higher Ig, relatively lower naive B cell associated transcripts) and subcluster 2 as prospective naive B cells (relatively lower Ig, relatively higher naive B cell associated transcripts).
  • FIG. 33 illustrates the pathological description of a tumor sample analyzed by single cell open chromatin (ATAC-seq) and gene expression analysis.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates cell type annotation of a tumor sample using gene expression (“GEX”, left panel) markers and transcription factor (“ATAC”, right panel) accessibility.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates the identification of tumor B cells from normal B cells using mutational load (SNVs) and the BANK1 pathway (markers of B cell hyper-activation).
  • SNVs mutational load
  • BANK1 pathway markers of B cell hyper-activation
  • FIG. 36 illustrates gene expression annotation of tumor cells to annotate and identify open chromatin cell populations.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates differential gene expression between normal and tumor B cells.
  • FCRL5 / FCRL3 encode members of the immunoglobulin receptor superfamily and the Fc- receptor like family. These genes are implicated in B cell development and lymphomagenesis.
  • MIR155HG represents a microRNA host gene. The long RNA transcribed from this gene is expressed at high levels in lymphoma and may function as an oncogene.
  • RASGRFl is a guanine nucleotide exchange factor (GEF) and is involved in MAP-Erk pathway.
  • IL4R is a receptor to a key inflammatory signaling factor, pro-growth and pro-metastatic.
  • XAF1 encodes a protein which binds to and counteracts the inhibitory effect of a member of the IAP (inhibitor of apoptosis) protein family.
  • BANK1 is a tumor suppressor in B cell lymphoma.
  • FIGs. 38A-38C illustrate, on the basis of covariance of open chromatin and gene expression, the identification of a candidate enhancer region that regulates the expression of the IL4R specifically in the tumor B cells.
  • Signal transducer and activator of transcription (STAT) proteins are critical mediators of cytokine signaling.
  • STAT6 is activated by IL-4 and IL-13 and plays a predominant role in the immune system.
  • gene expression and accessible chromatin characterization of Stat3 and Stat6 indicate that IL4R- mediated STAT6 signaling pathway is activated in this tumor.
  • FIG. 39 schematically illustrates correspondence between DNA sequencing information and RNA sequencing information obtained using the methods provided herein.
  • FIG. 40 illustrates an example workflow for identifying a cis-regulatory element associated with an expressed protein.
  • FIG. 41 illustrates the identification of tumor B cells from normal B cells using orthogonal lines of evidence.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates the application of gene expression and chromatin data to identify signaling pathways in a tumor system.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates an example flowchart showing a process flow for feature linkage analysis, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • FIG. 44 illustrates another example flowchart showing a process flow for feature linkage analysis, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • FIGs. 45A-45B illustrate an analysis of open chromatin and gene expression of the IL4R gene and observed feature linkages in tumor B cells.
  • FIG. 46A illustrates mean expression of genes in normal B cells, tumor B cells and cycling tumor B cells for selected top differentially expressed immune genes, transcription factors and cell cycle genes.
  • FIG. 46B illustrates an enriched functional gene set for up- regulated genes in tumor B cells.
  • FIG. 47 illustrates an exemplary workflow of transcription factor-gene network construction.
  • FIG. 48A illustrates linkage significance distribution for tumor-enriched feature linkages, separated by the overlap of CLL-annotated super-enhancers.
  • FIG. 48B illustrates ATAC cut site coverage and inferred feature linkages at the PAX5 locus (left) and per-cell type expression of PAX5 and linked peaks (right).
  • FIG. 49A illustrates an exemplary analysis workflow of motif enrichment and FIG. 49B illustrates the motif enrichment scores of all motifs (left) and the top enriched hits (right).
  • FIG. 50 illustrates a transcription factor regulatory network in tumor B cells.
  • FIG. 51 illustrates feature linkages which can be positively or negatively correlated signals across cells for peaks identified in an ATAC library and transcript levels identified in a gene expression library.
  • barcode generally refers to a label, or identifier, that conveys or is capable of conveying information about an analyte.
  • a barcode can be part of an analyte.
  • a barcode can be independent of an analyte.
  • a barcode can be a tag attached to an analyte (e.g., nucleic acid molecule) or a combination of the tag in addition to an endogenous characteristic of the analyte (e.g., size of the analyte or end sequence(s)).
  • a barcode may be unique. Barcodes can have a variety of different formats.
  • barcodes can include: polynucleotide barcodes; random nucleic acid and/or amino acid sequences; and synthetic nucleic acid and/or amino acid sequences.
  • a barcode can be attached to an analyte in a reversible or irreversible manner.
  • a barcode can be added to, for example, a fragment of a deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or ribonucleic acid (RNA) sample before, during, and/or after sequencing of the sample. Barcodes can allow for identification and/or quantification of individual sequencing-reads.
  • real time can refer to a response time of less than about 1 second, a tenth of a second, a hundredth of a second, a millisecond, or less.
  • the response time may be greater than 1 second.
  • real time can refer to simultaneous or substantially simultaneous processing, detection or identification.
  • the term “subject,” as used herein, generally refers to an animal, such as a mammal (e.g., human) or avian (e.g., bird), or other organism, such as a plant.
  • the subject can be a vertebrate, a mammal, a rodent (e.g., a mouse), a primate, a simian or a human.
  • Animals may include, but are not limited to, farm animals, sport animals, and pets.
  • a subject can be a healthy or asymptomatic individual, an individual that has or is suspected of having a disease (e.g., cancer) or a pre-disposition to the disease, and/or an individual that is in need of therapy or suspected of needing therapy.
  • a subject can be a patient.
  • a subject can be a microorganism or microbe (e.g., bacteria, fungi, archaea, viruses).
  • genomic information generally refers to genomic information from a subject, which may be, for example, at least a portion or an entirety of a subject’s hereditary information.
  • a genome can be encoded either in DNA or in RNA.
  • a genome can comprise coding regions (e.g., that code for proteins) as well as non-coding regions.
  • a genome can include the sequence of all chromosomes together in an organism.
  • the human genome ordinarily has a total of 46 chromosomes. The sequence of all of these together may constitute a human genome.
  • adaptor(s) can be used synonymously.
  • An adaptor or tag can be coupled to a polynucleotide sequence to be “tagged” by any approach, including ligation, hybridization, or other approaches.
  • sequence of nucleotide bases in one or more polynucleotides generally refers to methods and technologies for determining the sequence of nucleotide bases in one or more polynucleotides.
  • the polynucleotides can be, for example, nucleic acid molecules such as deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or ribonucleic acid (RNA), including variants or derivatives thereof (e.g., single stranded DNA). Sequencing can be performed by various systems currently available, such as, without limitation, a sequencing system by Illumina®, Pacific Biosciences (PacBio®), Oxford Nanopore®, or Life Technologies (Ion Torrent®).
  • sequencing may be performed using nucleic acid amplification, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (e.g., digital PCR, quantitative PCR, or real time PCR), or isothermal amplification.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • Such systems may provide a plurality of raw genetic data corresponding to the genetic information of a subject (e.g., human), as generated by the systems from a sample provided by the subject.
  • sequencing reads also “reads” herein).
  • a read may include a string of nucleic acid bases corresponding to a sequence of a nucleic acid molecule that has been sequenced.
  • systems and methods provided herein may be used with proteomic information.
  • the term “bead,” as used herein, generally refers to a particle.
  • the bead may be a solid or semi-solid particle.
  • the bead may be a gel bead.
  • the gel bead may include a polymer matrix (e.g., matrix formed by polymerization or cross-linking).
  • the polymer matrix may include one or more polymers (e.g., polymers having different functional groups or repeat units). Polymers in the polymer matrix may be randomly arranged, such as in random copolymers, and/or have ordered structures, such as in block copolymers. Cross-linking can be via covalent, ionic, or inductive, interactions, or physical entanglement.
  • the bead may be a macromolecule.
  • the bead may be formed of nucleic acid molecules bound together.
  • the bead may be formed via covalent or non-covalent assembly of molecules (e.g., macromolecules), such as monomers or polymers.
  • Such polymers or monomers may be natural or synthetic.
  • Such polymers or monomers may be or include, for example, nucleic acid molecules (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • the bead may be formed of a polymeric material.
  • the bead may be magnetic or non-magnetic.
  • the bead may be rigid.
  • the bead may be flexible and/or compressible.
  • the bead may be disruptable or dissolvable.
  • the bead may be a solid particle (e.g., a metal-based particle including but not limited to iron oxide, gold or silver) covered with a coating comprising one or more polymers. Such coating may be disruptable or dissolvable.
  • barcoded nucleic acid molecule generally refers to a nucleic acid molecule that results from, for example, the processing of a nucleic acid barcode molecule with a nucleic acid sequence (e.g., nucleic acid sequence complementary to a nucleic acid primer sequence encompassed by the nucleic acid barcode molecule).
  • the nucleic acid sequence may be a targeted sequence or a non-targeted sequence.
  • hybridization and reverse transcription of a nucleic acid molecule e.g., a messenger RNA (mRNA) molecule
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule e.g., a nucleic acid barcode molecule containing a barcode sequence and a nucleic acid primer sequence complementary to a nucleic acid sequence of the mRNA molecule
  • a barcoded nucleic acid molecule that has a sequence corresponding to the nucleic acid sequence of the mRNA and the barcode sequence (or a reverse complement thereof).
  • a barcoded nucleic acid molecule may serve as a template, such as a template polynucleotide, that can be further processed (e.g., amplified) and sequenced to obtain the target nucleic acid sequence.
  • a barcoded nucleic acid molecule may be further processed (e.g., amplified) and sequenced to obtain the nucleic acid sequence of the mRNA.
  • sample generally refers to a biological sample of a subject.
  • the biological sample may comprise any number of macromolecules, for example, cellular macromolecules.
  • the sample may be a cell sample.
  • the sample may be a cell line or cell culture sample.
  • the sample can include one or more cells.
  • the sample can include one or more microbes.
  • the biological sample may be a nucleic acid sample or protein sample.
  • the biological sample may also be a carbohydrate sample or a lipid sample.
  • the biological sample may be derived from another sample.
  • the sample may be a tissue sample, such as a biopsy, core biopsy, needle aspirate, or fine needle aspirate.
  • the sample may be a fluid sample, such as a blood sample, urine sample, or saliva sample.
  • the sample may be a skin sample.
  • the sample may be a cheek swab.
  • the sample may be a plasma or serum sample.
  • the sample may be a cell- free or cell free sample.
  • a cell-free sample may include extracellular polynucleotides. Extracellular polynucleotides may be isolated from a bodily sample that may be selected from the group consisting of blood, plasma, serum, urine, saliva, mucosal excretions, sputum, stool and tears.
  • the term “biological particle,” as used herein, generally refers to a discrete biological system derived from a biological sample.
  • the biological particle may be a macromolecule.
  • the biological particle may be a small molecule.
  • the biological particle may be a virus.
  • the biological particle may be a cell or derivative of a cell.
  • the biological particle may be an organelle.
  • the biological particle may be a rare cell from a population of cells.
  • the biological particle may be any type of cell, including without limitation prokaryotic cells, eukaryotic cells, bacterial, fungal, plant, mammalian, or other animal cell type, mycoplasmas, normal tissue cells, tumor cells, or any other cell type, whether derived from single cell or multicellular organisms.
  • the biological particle may be a constituent of a cell.
  • the biological particle may be or may include DNA, RNA, organelles, proteins, or any combination thereof.
  • the biological particle may be or may include a matrix (e.g., a gel or polymer matrix) comprising a cell or one or more constituents from a cell (e.g., cell bead), such as DNA, RNA, organelles, proteins, or any combination thereof, from the cell.
  • the biological particle may be obtained from a tissue of a subject.
  • the biological particle may be a hardened cell. Such hardened cell may or may not include a cell wall or cell membrane.
  • the biological particle may include one or more constituents of a cell, but may not include other constituents of the cell.
  • a cell may be a live cell.
  • the live cell may be capable of being cultured, for example, being cultured when enclosed in a gel or polymer matrix, or cultured when comprising a gel or polymer matrix.
  • the term “macromolecular constituent,” as used herein, generally refers to a macromolecule contained within or from a biological particle.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise a nucleic acid.
  • the biological particle may be a macromolecule.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise DNA.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise RNA.
  • the RNA may be coding or non-coding.
  • the RNA may be messenger RNA (mRNA), ribosomal RNA (rRNA) or transfer RNA (tRNA), for example.
  • the RNA may be a transcript.
  • the RNA may be small RNA that are less than 200 nucleic acid bases in length, or large RNA that are greater than 200 nucleic acid bases in length.
  • Small RNAs may include 5.8S ribosomal RNA (rRNA), 5S rRNA, transfer RNA (tRNA), microRNA (miRNA), small interfering RNA (siRNA), small nucleolar RNA (snoRNAs), Piwi-interacting RNA (piRNA), tRNA-derived small RNA (tsRNA) and small rDNA-derived RNA (srRNA).
  • the RNA may be double-stranded RNA or single-stranded RNA.
  • the RNA may be circular RNA.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise a protein.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise a peptide.
  • the macromolecular constituent may comprise a polypeptide.
  • the term “molecular tag,” as used herein, generally refers to a molecule capable of binding to a macromolecular constituent.
  • the molecular tag may bind to the macromolecular constituent with high affinity.
  • the molecular tag may bind to the macromolecular constituent with high specificity.
  • the molecular tag may comprise a nucleotide sequence.
  • the molecular tag may comprise a nucleic acid sequence.
  • the nucleic acid sequence may be at least a portion or an entirety of the molecular tag.
  • the molecular tag may be a nucleic acid molecule or may be part of a nucleic acid molecule.
  • the molecular tag may be an oligonucleotide or a polypeptide.
  • the molecular tag may comprise a DNA aptamer.
  • the molecular tag may be or comprise a primer.
  • the molecular tag may be, or comprise, a protein.
  • the molecular tag may comprise a polypeptide.
  • the molecular tag may be a barcode.
  • partition refers to a space or volume that may be suitable to contain one or more species or conduct one or more reactions.
  • a partition may be a physical compartment, such as a droplet or well. The partition may isolate space or volume from another space or volume.
  • the droplet may be a first phase (e.g., aqueous phase) in a second phase (e.g., oil) immiscible with the first phase.
  • the droplet may be a first phase in a second phase that does not phase separate from the first phase, such as, for example, a capsule or liposome in an aqueous phase.
  • a partition may comprise one or more other (inner) partitions.
  • a partition may be a virtual compartment that can be defined and identified by an index (e.g., indexed libraries) across multiple and/or remote physical compartments.
  • a physical compartment may comprise a plurality of virtual compartments.
  • the present disclosure provides methods, systems, and kits for processing multiple types of nucleic acid molecules.
  • the methods, systems, and kits provided herein may facilitate sample preparation for sequencing of nucleic acid molecules included in cells, cell beads, or cell nuclei of interest.
  • the present disclosure provides methods for processing both deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) and ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the methods may comprise performing Assay for Transposase Accessible Chromatin with high-throughput sequencing (ATAC-seq) and RNA sequencing (RNA-seq) assays in tandem. Partitioning and barcoding schemes may be utilized to facilitate identification of resultant sequencing reads with the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus from which they are derived.
  • the present disclosure also provides methods, systems, and kits for processing biological samples comprising nucleic acid molecules.
  • the method may comprise providing one or more nucleic acid molecules (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules and/or ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules) from a nucleic acid sample (e.g., a sample comprising a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus) in a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., a plurality of droplets or wells).
  • nucleic acid sample e.g., a sample comprising a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • a partition of a plurality of partitions e.g., a plurality of droplets or wells.
  • the one or more nucleic acid molecules may be one or more DNA molecules.
  • the one or more DNA molecules may be transcribed to generate one or more RNA molecules, where the one or more RNA molecules may be reverse transcribed to generate one or more complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules.
  • the one or more cDNA molecules, or derivatives thereof, may then be recovered from the partition of the plurality of partitions (e.g., by pooling the contents of the plurality of partitions).
  • the one or more cDNA molecules, or derivatives thereof may comprise one or more nucleic acid barcode sequences, or complements thereof, where the one or more nucleic acid barcode sequences, or complements thereof, may be incorporated into nucleic acid molecules during any processing step (e.g., during transcription of a DNA molecule, reverse transcription of an RNA molecule, etc.).
  • the one or more nucleic acid barcode sequences, or complements thereof may be used to identify sequencing reads (e.g., sequencing reads obtained using a nucleic acid sequencing assay) corresponding to the one or more cDNA molecules from a nucleic acid molecule of the one or more nucleic acid molecules from the nucleic acid sample. Tandem DNA and RNA Barcoding
  • the present disclosure provides a method for processing nucleic acid molecules from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the method may comprise contacting a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus with a transposase-nucleic acid complex comprising a transposase molecule and one or more transposon end oligonucleotide molecules.
  • the cell, cell bead or cell nucleus may be contacted with a transposase-nucleic acid complex in bulk solution, such that the cell, cell bead or cell nucleus undergoes “tagmentation” via a tagmentation reaction.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus with the transposase-nucleic acid complex may generate one or more template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., “tagmented fragments” or “tagged fragments”).
  • the one or more template nucleic acid fragments may correspond to one or more target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules) within the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be contacted with a primer molecule (e.g., a primer molecule comprising a poly-T sequence) configured to interact with one or more additional target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules, such as messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules).
  • RNA ribonucleic acid
  • mRNA messenger RNA
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be contacted with a primer molecule in bulk solution.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be contacted with a primer molecule within a partition. Interaction between these moieties may yield one or more additional template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., RNA fragments).
  • the primer molecule may have at least partial sequence complementarity to the one or more additional target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., mRNA molecules).
  • the primer molecule may hybridize to a sequence of an additional target nucleic acid molecule of the one or more additional target nucleic acid molecules.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be partitioned (e.g., co-partitioned with one or more reagents) into a partition (e.g., of a plurality of partitions).
  • the partition may be, for example, a droplet or a well.
  • the partition may comprise one or more reagents, including, for example, one or more particles (e.g., beads) comprising one or more nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed, permeabilized, fixed, cross-linked or otherwise manipulated to provide access to the one or more template nucleic acid fragments and the one or more additional template nucleic acid fragments therein.
  • the one or more template nucleic acid fragments and the one or more additional template nucleic acid fragments therein may undergo one or more processing steps within the partition.
  • the one or more template nucleic acid fragments and/or the one or more additional template nucleic acid fragments may undergo a barcoding process, a ligation process, a reverse transcription process, a template switching process, a linear amplification process, and/or a gap filling process.
  • the resultant one or more processed template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., tagmented fragments) and/or the one or more processed additional template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., RNA fragments) may each include a barcode sequence (e.g., a nucleic acid barcode sequence, as described herein).
  • the one or more processed template nucleic acid fragments and/or the one or more processed additional template nucleic acid fragments may be released from the partition (e.g., pooled with contents of other partitions of a plurality of partitions) and may undergo one or more additional processing steps in bulk.
  • the one or more processed template nucleic acid fragments and/or the one or more processed additional template nucleic acid fragments may undergo a gap filling process, a dA tailing process, a terminal-transferase process, a phosphorylation process, a ligation process, a nucleic acid amplification process, or a combination thereof.
  • the one or more processed template nucleic acid fragments and/or the one or more processed additional template nucleic acid fragments may be subjected to conditions sufficient to undergo one or more polymerase chain reactions (PCR, such as sequence independent PCR) to generate amplification products corresponding to the one or more processed template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., tagmented fragments) and/or the one or more processed additional template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., RNA fragments).
  • PCR polymerase chain reactions
  • Sequences of such amplification products can be detected using, for example, a nucleic acid sequencing assay and used to identify sequences of the one or more target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., DNA molecules) and the one or more additional target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., RNA molecules) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus from which they derive.
  • a nucleic acid sequencing assay used to identify sequences of the one or more target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., DNA molecules) and the one or more additional target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., RNA molecules) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus from which they derive.
  • a biological sample may comprise one or more cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei.
  • a biological sample may also comprise tissue, which tissue may comprise one or more cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei.
  • tissue may comprise one or more cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei.
  • a biological sample may comprise a plurality of cells comprising a plurality of cell nuclei.
  • a biological sample may comprise a plurality of cell nuclei, which plurality of cell nuclei are not included within cells (e.g., other components of the cell have degraded, dissociated, dissolved, or otherwise been removed).
  • a biological sample may comprise a plurality of cell-free nucleic acid molecules (e.g., nucleic acid molecules that are not included within cells).
  • a biological sample may comprise a plurality of cell-free fetal DNA (cffDNA) or circulating tumor DNA (ctDNA) or other cell-free nucleic acid molecules (e.g., deriving from degraded
  • Such a biological sample may be processed to separate such cell-free nucleic acid molecules from cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei, which cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei may be subjected to further processing (e.g., as described herein).
  • Nucleic acid molecules included within a biological sample may include, for example, DNA molecules and RNA molecules.
  • a biological sample may comprise genomic DNA comprising chromatin (e.g., within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus).
  • a biological sample may comprise a plurality of RNA molecules, such as a plurality of pre-mRNA or mRNA molecules (e.g., within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus).
  • mRNA molecules and other RNA molecules may comprise a polyA sequence. At least a subset of a plurality of RNA molecules included in a cell or cell bead may be present in a cell nucleus.
  • a nucleic acid molecule may undergo one or more processing steps within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus. For example, chromatin within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be contacted with a transposase.
  • a transposase may be included within a transposase-nucleic acid complex, which transposase-nucleic acid complex may comprise a transposase molecule and one or more transposon end oligonucleotide molecules.
  • a transposase may be a Tn transposase, such as a Tn3, Tn5, Tn7, TnlO, Tn552, Tn903 transposase.
  • a transposase may be a MuA transposase, a Vibhar transposase (e.g. from Vibrio harveyi ), Ac-Ds, Ascot- 1, Bsl, Cin4, Copia, En/Spm, F element, hobo, Hsmarl, Hsmar2, IN (HIV), IS1, IS2, IS3, IS4, IS5, IS6, IS 10, IS21, IS30, IS50, IS51, IS150, IS256, IS407, IS427, IS630, IS903, IS911, IS982, IS1031, ISL2, LI, Mariner, P element, Tam3, Tel, Tc3, Tel, THE-1, Tn/O, TnA, Tn3, Tn5, Tn7, TnlO, Tn552, Tn903, Toll, Tol2, TnlO, Tyl, any prokaryotic transposase, or any transposase related to and/or derived from those listed above.
  • Vibhar transposase
  • a transposase may be a Tn5 transposase or a mutated, hyperactive Tn5 transposase.
  • a transposase related to and/or derived from a parent transposase may comprise a peptide fragment with at least about 50%, about 55%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, or about 99% amino acid sequence homology to a corresponding peptide fragment of the parent transposase.
  • the peptide fragment may be at least about 10, about 15, about 20, about 25, about 30, about 35, about 40, about 45, about 50, about 60, about 70, about 80, about 90, about 100, about 150, about 200, about 250, about 300, about 400, or about 500 amino acids in length.
  • a transposase derived from Tn5 may comprise a peptide fragment that is 50 amino acids in length and about 80% homologous to a corresponding fragment in a parent Tn5 transposase.
  • Action of a transposase may be facilitated and/or triggered by addition of one or more cations, such as one or more divalent cations (e.g., Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ , or Mn 2+ ).
  • cations such as one or more divalent cations (e.g., Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ , or Mn 2+ ).
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may comprise one or more nucleic acid molecules.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may comprise one or more transposon end oligonucleotide molecules.
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise one or more adapter sequences (e.g., comprising one or more primer sequences) and/or one or more transposon end sequences.
  • a transposon end sequence may be, for example, a Tn5 or modified Tn5 transposon end sequence or a Mu transposon end sequence.
  • a transposon end sequence may have a sequence of, for example, AG AT GT GT AT A AG AG AC A (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • a primer sequence of a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may be a sequencing primer, such as an R1 or R2 sequencing primer, or a portion thereof.
  • a sequencing primer may be, for example, a TrueSeq or Nextera sequencing primer.
  • An R1 sequencing primer region may have a sequence of
  • An R1 sequencing primer region may have a sequence of
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise a partial R1 sequence.
  • a partial R1 sequence may be
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise an R2 sequencing priming region.
  • R2 sequencing primer region may have a sequence of
  • An R2 sequencing primer region may have a sequence of
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise a T7 promoter sequence.
  • a T7 promoter sequence may be
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise a region at least 70%, 71%, 72%,
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise a P5 sequence and/or a P7 sequence.
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may comprise a sample index sequence, such as a barcode sequence or unique molecular identifier sequence.
  • transposon end oligonucleotide molecules of a transposase-nucleic acid complex may be attached to a solid support (e.g., a solid or semi-solid particle such as a bead (e.g., gel bead)).
  • a transposon end oligonucleotide molecule may be releasably coupled to a solid support (e.g., a bead).
  • Examples of transposon end oligonucleotide molecules may be found in, for example, PCT Patent Publications Nos. WO2018/218226, WO2014/189957, US. Pat. Pub. 20180340171, and U.S. Pat.
  • FIG. 9 includes an example of a transposase-nucleic acid complex for use in the methods provided herein.
  • Transposase-nucleic acid complex 900 e.g., comprising a transpose dimer
  • Partially double-stranded oligonucleotide 901 comprises transposon end sequence 903, first primer sequence 902, and a sequence 904 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 903.
  • Partially double-stranded oligonucleotide 905 comprises transposon end sequence 906, first primer sequence 907, and a sequence 908 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 906.
  • Primer sequences 902 and 907 may be the same or different. In some cases, primer sequence 902 may be designated “Rl” and primer sequence 907 may be designated “R2”.
  • Transposon end sequences 903 and 906 may be the same or different. Transposon end sequences 903 and 906 may alternately be referred to as “mosaic end” or “ME” sequences, while their complementary sequences 904 and 908 may be referred to as “mosaic end reverse complement” or “MErc” sequences.
  • FIG. 10 includes another example of a transposase-nucleic acid complex for use in the methods provided herein.
  • Transposase-nucleic acid complex 1000 e.g., comprising a transpose dimer
  • forked adapters 1001 and 1006 which forked adapters are partially double-stranded oligonucleotides.
  • Partially double-stranded oligonucleotide 1001 comprises transposon end sequence 1003, first primer sequence 1002, second primer sequence 1005, and a sequence 1004 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 1003.
  • Partially double- stranded oligonucleotide 1006 comprises transposon end sequence 1007, first primer sequence 1008, second primer sequence 1010, and a sequence 1009 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 1007.
  • Primer sequences 1002, 1005, 1008, and 1010 may be the same or different.
  • primer sequences 1002 and 1008 may be designated “Rl” and primer sequences 1005 and 1010 may be designated “R2”.
  • primer sequences 1002 and 1010 may be designated “Rl” and primer sequences 1005 and 1008 may be designated “R2”.
  • primer sequences 1002 and 1008 may be designated “R2” and primer sequences 1005 and 1010 may be designated “Rl”.
  • primer sequences 1002 and 1010 may be designated “R2” and primer sequences 1005 and 1008 may be designated “Rl”.
  • Transposon end sequences 1003 and 1007 may be the same or different. These sequences may alternately be referred to as “mosaic end” or “ME” sequences, while their complementary sequences 1004 and 1009 may be referred to as “mosaic end reverse complement” or “MErc” sequences.
  • FIG. 11 shows transposase-nucleic acid complex 1100 (e.g., comprising a transpose dimer) comprising hairpin molecules 1101 and 1106.
  • Hairpin molecule 1101 comprises transposon end sequence 1103, first hairpin sequence 1102, second hairpin sequence 1105, and a sequence 1104 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 1103.
  • Hairpin molecule 1106 comprises transposon end sequence 1107, third hairpin sequence 1108, fourth hairpin sequence 1110, and a sequence 1109 that is complementary to transposon end sequence 1107.
  • Hairpin sequences 1102, 1105, 1108, and 1110 may be the same or different.
  • hairpin sequence 1105 may be the same or different as hairpin sequence 1110, and/or hairpin sequence 1102 may be the same or different as hairpin sequence 1108.
  • Hairpin sequences 1102 and 1108 may be spacer sequences or adapter sequences.
  • Hairpin sequences 1105 and 1110 may be a promoter sequence such as T7 recognition or promoter sequences and/or UMI sequences.
  • Transposon end sequences 1103 and 1107 may be the same or different. Transposon end sequences 1103 and 1107 may alternately be referred to as “mosaic end” or “ME” sequences, while their complementary sequences 1104 and 1109 may be referred to as “mosaic end reverse complement” or “MErc” sequences.
  • sequence 1104 is a transposon end sequence and 1103 is a sequence complementary to sequence 1104.
  • sequence 1109 is a transposon end sequence and 1107 is a sequence complementary to sequence 1109.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may generate one or more template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., “tagmented fragments”).
  • the one or more template nucleic acid fragments may each comprise a sequence of the one or more target nucleic acid molecules (e.g., a target sequence).
  • the transposase-nucleic acid complex may be configured to target a specific region of the one or more target nucleic acid molecules to provide one or more template nucleic acid fragments comprising specific target sequences.
  • the one or more template nucleic acid fragments may comprise target sequences corresponding to accessible chromatin. Generation of tagmented fragments may take place within a bulk solution. In other cases, generation of tagmented fragments may take place within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well).
  • a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) may comprise one or more gaps (e.g., between a transposon end sequence or complement thereof and a target sequence on one or both strands of a double-stranded fragment). Gaps may be filled via a gap filling process using, e.g., a polymerase (e.g., DNA polymerase), ligase, or reverse transcriptase. In some cases, a mixture of enzymes may be used to repair a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule and fill one or more gaps. Gap filling may not include strand displacement. Gaps may be filled within or outside of a partition.
  • one or more additional nucleic acid molecules may be contacted with one or more capture nucleic acid molecules within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus to provide one or more additional template nucleic acid fragments.
  • an RNA molecule e.g., an mRNA
  • a primer molecule may comprise a primer sequence, which primer sequence may be a targeted primer sequence or a non-specific primer sequence (e.g., random N-mer).
  • a targeted primer sequence may comprise, for example, a polyT sequence, which polyT sequence may interact with a polyA sequence of an RNA molecule.
  • a primer nucleic acid molecule may also comprise one or more additional sequences, such as one or more sample index sequences, spacer or linker sequences, or one or more additional primer sequences.
  • Generation of additional template nucleic acid fragments may take place within a bulk solution. In other cases, generation of additional template nucleic acid fragments may take place within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well).
  • Processing of nucleic acid molecules within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may occur in a bulk solution comprising a plurality of cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei.
  • template nucleic acid fragments e.g., tagmented fragments
  • additional template nucleic acid fragments e.g., RNA fragments
  • a plurality of cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei may be partitioned amongst a plurality of partitions.
  • Partitions may be, for example, droplets or wells. Droplets (e.g., aqueous droplets) may be generated according to the methods provided herein. Partitioning may be performed according to the method provided herein.
  • partitioning a biological particle (e.g., cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus) and one or more reagents may comprise flowing a first phase comprising an aqueous fluid, the biological particle, and the one or more reagents and a second phase comprising a fluid that is immiscible with the aqueous fluid toward a junction.
  • a discrete droplet of the first phase comprising the biological particle and the one or more reagents may be formed.
  • the plurality of cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei may be partitioned amongst a plurality of partitions such that at least a subset of the plurality of partitions may comprise at most one cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • Cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents such that a partition of at least a subset of the plurality of partitions comprises a single cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and one or more reagents.
  • the one or more reagents may include, for example, enzymes (e.g., polymerases, reverse transcriptases, ligases, etc.), nucleic acid barcode molecules (e.g., nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising one or more barcode sequences, such as nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to one or more beads), template switching oligonucleotides, deoxynucleotide triphosphates, buffers, lysis agents, primers, barcodes, detergents, reducing agents, chelating agents, oxidizing agents, nanoparticles, beads, antibodies, or any other useful reagents.
  • enzymes e.g., polymerases, reverse transcriptases, ligases, etc.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules e.g., nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising one or more barcode sequences, such as nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to one or more beads
  • template switching oligonucleotides e.g., deoxynucle
  • Enzymes may include, for example, temperature-sensitive enzymes, pH-sensitive enzymes, light-sensitive enzymes, reverse transcriptases, proteases, ligases, polymerases, kinases, restriction enzymes, nucleases, protease inhibitors, exonucleases, and nuclease inhibitors.
  • a reagent of the one or more reagents may be useful for lysing or permeabilizing a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or otherwise providing access to nucleic acid molecules and/or template nucleic acid fragments therein.
  • a cell may be lysed using a lysis agent such as a bioactive agent.
  • a bioactive agent useful for lysing a cell may be, for example, an enzyme (e.g., as described herein).
  • An enzyme used to lyse a cell may or may not be capable of carrying out additional actions such as degrading one or more RNA molecules.
  • an ionic, zwitterionic, or non-ionic surfactant may be used to lyse a cell.
  • surfactants include, but are not limited to, TritonX-100, Tween 20, sarcosyl, or sodium dodecyl sulfate.
  • Cell lysis may also be achieved using a cellular disruption method such as an electroporation or a thermal, acoustic, or mechanical disruption method.
  • a cell may be permeabilized to provide access to a plurality of nucleic acid molecules included therein.
  • Permeabilization may involve partially or completely dissolving or disrupting a cell membrane or a portion thereof. Permeabilization may be achieved by, for example, contacting a cell membrane with an organic solvent or a detergent such as Triton X-100 or NP-40.
  • a partition e.g., droplet
  • molecules originating from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be isolated within the same partition.
  • a partition of a plurality of partitions may comprise one or more beads (e.g., gel beads).
  • a bead may be a gel bead.
  • a bead may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules (e.g., nucleic acid molecules each comprising one or more barcode sequences, as described herein).
  • a bead may comprise at least 10,000 nucleic acid barcode molecules attached thereto.
  • the bead may comprise at least 100,000, 1,000,000, or 10,000,000 nucleic acid barcode molecules attached thereto.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be releasably attached to the bead.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be releasable from the bead upon application of a stimulus.
  • a stimulus may be selected from the group consisting of a thermal stimulus, a photo stimulus, and a chemical stimulus.
  • the stimulus may be a reducing agent such as dithiothreitol
  • Application of a stimulus may result in one or more of (i) cleavage of a linkage between nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the bead, and (ii) degradation or dissolution of the bead to release nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules from the bead.
  • a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached (e.g., releasably attached) to a bead may be suitable for barcoding template nucleic acid fragments or additional template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA and/or RNA molecules of the plurality of cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecule may comprise a barcode sequence, unique molecular identifier (UMI) sequence, primer sequence, universal primer sequence, sequencing adapter or primer, flow cell adapter sequence, or any other useful feature.
  • UMI unique molecular identifier
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to a bead may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence), a barcode sequence, a capture sequence, and a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 sequence or portion thereof), or a complement of any of these sequences.
  • a flow cell adapter sequence e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence
  • a barcode sequence e.g., a capture sequence
  • a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof e.g., an R1 or R2 sequence or portion thereof
  • the flow cell adapter sequence may be disposed near (e.g., proximal to) an end of the nucleic acid barcode molecule that is closest to the bead, while the sequencing primer or portion thereof may be disposed at an end of the nucleic acid barcode molecule that is furthest from (e.g., distal to) the bead (e.g., most available to template nucleic acid fragments for interaction).
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to a bead may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence), a barcode sequence, a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 sequence or portion thereof), and a UMI sequence, or a complement of any of these sequences.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule may further comprise a capture sequence, which capture sequence may be a targeted capture sequence or comprise a template switch sequence (e.g., comprising a polyC or poly G sequence). These sequences may be arranged in any useful order and may be linked or may include one or more spacer sequences disposed between them.
  • the flow cell adapter sequence may be disposed near (e.g., proximal to) an end of the nucleic acid barcode molecule that is closest to the bead, while the capture sequence or template switch sequence may be disposed at an end of the nucleic acid barcode molecule that is furthest from the bead (e.g., most available to template nucleic acid fragments for interaction).
  • All of the nucleic acid barcode molecules attached (e.g., releasably attached) to a bead (e.g., gel bead) of a plurality of beads may be the same.
  • all of the nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to the bead may have the same nucleic acid sequence.
  • all of the nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to the bead may comprise the same flow cell adapter sequence, sequencing primer or portion thereof, and barcode sequence.
  • the barcode sequence of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to a bead of a plurality of beads may be different from other barcode sequences of other nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to other beads of the plurality of beads.
  • a plurality of beads may comprise a plurality of barcode sequences, such that, for at least a subset of the plurality of beads, each bead comprises a different barcode sequence of the plurality of barcode sequences.
  • This differentiation may permit template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., included within cells, cell beads, and/or cell nuclei) co-partitioned with a plurality of beads between a plurality of partitions to be differentially barcoded within their respective partitions, such that the template nucleic acid fragments or molecules derived therefrom may be identified with the partition (and thus the cell, cell bead, and/or cell nucleus) to which they correspond (e.g., using a nucleic acid sequencing assay, as described herein).
  • a barcode sequence may comprise between 4-20 nucleotides.
  • a barcode sequence may comprise one or more segments, which segments may range in size from 2-20 nucleotides, such as from 4-20 nucleotides. Such segments may be combined to form barcode sequences using a combinatorial assembly method, such as a split- pool method. Details of such methods can be found, for example, in PCT/US2018/061391, filed November 15, 2018, and US 20190249226, each of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to a bead may not be the same.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to a bead may each comprise a UMI sequence, which UMI sequence varies across the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules. All other sequences of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to the bead may be the same.
  • a bead may comprise multiple different nucleic acid barcode molecules attached thereto.
  • a bead may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules, which first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules is different than the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead may comprise one or more shared sequences.
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise the same barcode sequence (e.g., as described herein).
  • a barcode sequence may be prepared using a combinatorial assembly process (e.g., as described herein).
  • barcode sequences may comprise identical barcode sequence segments.
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead may comprise the same flow cell adapter sequence and/or sequencing primer or portion thereof as each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the bead.
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead comprises a sequencing primer
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the bead comprises a portion of the same sequencing primer
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead may comprise a first sequencing primer (e.g., a TruSeq R1 sequence) a barcode sequence, and a first functional sequence
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the bead may comprise a second sequencing primer (e.g., a Nextera R1 sequence, or a portion thereof), the barcode sequence, and a second functional sequence.
  • Sequences shared between different sets of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the same bead may be included in the same or different order and may be separated by the same or different sequences.
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead may include one or more different sequences.
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to a bead of a plurality of beads may comprise one or more of a flow cell adapter sequence, a barcode sequence, UMI sequence, capture sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the bead may comprise one or more of a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., the same flow cell adapter sequence), a barcode sequence (e.g., the same barcode sequence), UMI sequence, capture sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., the same sequencing primer or portion thereof).
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecules of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may not include a UMI sequence or capture sequence.
  • a bead comprising multiple different populations of nucleic acid barcode molecules, such as a first plurality of nucleic acid molecules and a second plurality of nucleic acid molecules (e.g., as described above), may be referred to as a “multi-functional bead.”
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragments may be co partitioned with one or more beads (e.g., as described herein).
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be co-partitioned with a first bead (e.g., first gel bead) configured to interact with a first set of template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules, such as tagmented fragments) and a second bead (e.g., second gel bead) configured to interact with a second set of template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., additional template nucleic acid fragments deriving from RNA molecules).
  • a first bead e.g., first gel bead
  • template nucleic acid fragments e.g., template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules, such as tagmented fragments
  • second bead e.g., second gel bead
  • the first bead may comprise a first nucleic acid molecule comprising a flow cell adapter sequence, a barcode sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof, which sequencing primer or portion thereof may be configured to interact with (e.g., anneal or hybridize to) a complementary sequence included in template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or derivatives thereof.
  • the second bead may comprise a second nucleic acid molecule comprising the flow cell adapter sequence, the barcode sequence, the sequencing primer or a portion thereof, a UMI sequence, and a capture sequence, which capture sequence may be configured to interact with (e.g., anneal or hybridize to) a sequence of template nucleic acid fragments deriving from RNA molecules of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or derivatives thereof.
  • the capture sequence may be configured to interact with a sequence of a cDNA molecule generated upon reverse transcription of an RNA fragment.
  • the first and second beads may be linked together (e.g., covalently or non-covalently).
  • the first and second beads may each comprise a plurality of nucleic acid molecules.
  • the first bead may comprise a plurality of first nucleic acid molecules and the second bead may comprise a plurality of second nucleic acid molecules, where each first nucleic acid molecule of the plurality of first nucleic acid molecules comprises a first shared sequence and each second nucleic acid molecule of the plurality of second nucleic acid molecules comprises a second shared sequence.
  • the first shared sequence and the second shared sequence may be the same or different.
  • the first shared sequence and the second shared sequence may comprise one or more shared components, such as a shared barcode sequence or sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragments may be co-partitioned with a single bead (e.g., gel bead).
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be co-partitioned with a bead comprising (i) a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules configured to interact with a first set of template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules, such as tagmented fragments), or derivatives thereof, and (ii) a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules configured to interact with a second set of template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., additional template nucleic acid fragments deriving from RNA molecules), or derivatives thereof (such as cDNA generated from an RNA fragment).
  • a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules configured to interact with a first set of template nucleic acid fragments (e.g., template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules, such as tagmented fragments), or derivatives thereof
  • a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules configured to interact with a second set of template
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence, a barcode sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof, which sequencing primer or portion thereof may be configured to interact with (e.g., anneal or hybridize to) a complementary sequence included in template nucleic acid fragments deriving from DNA molecules of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or derivatives thereof.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise the flow cell adapter sequence, the barcode sequence, the sequencing primer or a portion thereof, a UMI sequence, and a capture sequence, which capture sequence may be configured to interact with (e.g., anneal or hybridize to) a sequence of template nucleic acid fragments deriving from RNA molecules of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or derivatives thereof, such as cDNA generated from an RNA fragment.
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise approximately the same number of nucleic acid barcode molecules as the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a greater number of nucleic acid barcode molecules than the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules, or vice versa.
  • the distribution of nucleic acid barcode molecules on a bead may be controlled by, for example, sequence control, concentration control, and or blocking methods during assembly of the nucleic acid barcode molecules on the bead. Details of such processes are provided in, for example, PCT/US2018/061391, filed November 15, 2018, and US 20190249226, each of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • FIGs. 8A and 8B show examples of beads for use according to the method provided herein.
  • FIG. 8A shows a first bead 801 and a second bead 811 that may be co-partitioned with a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., droplets or wells).
  • First bead 801 may comprise nucleic acid molecule 802.
  • Nucleic acid molecule 802 may comprise sequences 803, 804, and 805.
  • Sequence 803 may be, for example, a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence).
  • Sequence 804 may be, for example, a barcode sequence.
  • Sequence 805 may be, for example, a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof).
  • Nucleic acid molecule 802 may also include additional sequences, such as a UMI sequence.
  • First bead 801 may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid molecules 802.
  • Second bead 811 may comprise nucleic acid molecule 812.
  • Nucleic acid molecule 812 may comprise sequences 813, 814, and 815.
  • Sequence 813 may be, for example, a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence).
  • Sequence 814 may be, for example, a barcode sequence.
  • Sequence 815 may be, for example, a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof).
  • Nucleic acid molecule 812 may also include additional sequences, such as a UMI sequence and a capture sequence.
  • Second bead 801 may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid molecules 812.
  • FIG. 8B shows a bead 821 (e.g., a multifunctional bead having two or more species of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached or coupled thereto) that may be co-partitioned with a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., droplets or wells).
  • Bead 821 may comprise nucleic acid molecule 822 and nucleic acid molecule 826.
  • Nucleic acid molecule 822 may comprise sequences 823, 824, and 825.
  • Sequence 823 may be, for example, a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence).
  • Sequence 824 may be, for example, a barcode sequence.
  • Sequence 825 may be, for example, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof, such as a Nextera R1 sequence or portion thereof). In some instances, sequence 825 may also be, for example, a sequence configured to hybridize to a splint oligonucleotide as described elsewhere herein. Nucleic acid molecule 826 may comprise sequences 827, 828, and 829. Sequence 827 may be, for example, a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 or P7 sequence). Sequence 828 may be, for example, a barcode sequence (e.g., the same barcode sequence as sequence 824).
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof, such as a Nextera R1 sequence or portion thereof.
  • sequence 825 may also be, for example, a sequence configured to hybridize to a splint oligonucleotide as described elsewhere
  • Sequence 829 may be, for example, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof).
  • Sequence 827 may be, for example, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 primer sequence, or portion thereof, such as a TruSeq R1 sequence, or portion thereof).
  • Sequence 828 may be, for example, a barcode sequence (e.g., the same barcode sequence as 824).
  • Sequence 829 may be, for example, a capture sequence (e.g., a poly-T sequence), such as a capture sequence that is configured to hybridize with a target nucleic acid molecule (e.g., mRNA molecule).
  • Sequence 829 may be, for example, a template switching oligonucleotide (TSO) sequence configured to facilitate a template switching reaction with a target nucleic acid molecule (e.g., mRNA molecule).
  • TSO template switching oligonucleotide
  • Sequence 823 and sequence 827 may be the same. Alternatively, sequence 823 and sequence 827 may be different.
  • sequence 824 and sequence 828 may be different.
  • Sequence 825 and sequence 829 may be the same. Alternatively, sequence 825 and sequence 829 may be the same. Alternatively, sequence 825 and sequence 829 may be the same. Alternatively, sequence 825 and sequence
  • Nucleic acid molecules 822 and 826 may also include additional sequences, such as a UMI sequence and a capture sequence.
  • Bead 821 may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid molecules 822 and a plurality of nucleic acid molecules 826.
  • an RNA fragment e.g., a molecule comprising a sequence of an RNA molecule of a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus that is hybridized to a primer molecule
  • the RNA fragment may be reverse transcribed to generate a complementary cDNA strand, which cDNA strand may be barcoded.
  • template switching can be used to increase the length of a cDNA (e.g., via incorporation of one or more sequences, such as one or more barcode or unique molecular identifier sequences).
  • cDNA can be generated from reverse transcription of a template (e.g., an mRNA molecule) where a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity can add additional nucleotides, e.g., po!yC, to the cDNA that are not encoded by the template, such, as at an end of the cDNA.
  • Template switch oligonucleotides e.g., switch oligos
  • the additional nucleotides (e.g , polyC) on the cDNA can hybridize to the sequences complementary to the additional nucleotides (e.g., polyG) on the template switch oligonucleotide, whereby the template switch oligonucleotide can be used by the reverse transcriptase as template to further extend the cDNA.
  • Template switch oligonucleotides may comprise deoxyribonucleic acids, ribonucleic acids, modified nucleic acids including locked nucleic acids (LNA), or any combination thereof.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide may comprise one or more sequences including, for example, one or more sequences selected from the group consisting of a sequencing primer, a barcode sequence, a unique molecular identifier sequence, and a homopolymer sequence (e.g., a polyG sequence), or a complement of any of the preceding sequence.
  • the length of a template switch oligonucleotide may be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109 110, 111 112, 113
  • an adapter and/or barcode sequence may be added to an RNA molecule via a method other than template switching.
  • one or more sequences may be ligated to an end of an RNA molecule.
  • one or more sequences may be ligated to an end of a cDNA molecule generated via reverse transcription of an RNA molecule.
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising chromatin and one or more RNA molecules is provided.
  • the chromatin in the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed to provide a first template nucleic acid fragment derived from the chromatin (e.g., a tagmented fragment, as described herein).
  • the chromatin may be processed in bulk solution.
  • RNA molecule may be processed to provide a second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule (e.g., as described herein).
  • the RNA molecule may be processed within a partition.
  • the configuration of the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially dependent on the structure of the transposase-nucleic acid complex used to generate the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex such as that shown in FIG. 9 may be used to prepare the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially double-stranded.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a double-stranded region comprising sequences of chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a first end of a first strand of the double- stranded region may be linked to a first transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which first transposon end sequence may be linked to a first sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • a first end of the second strand of the double-stranded region, which end is opposite the first end of the first strand may be linked to a second transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which second transposon end sequence may be linked to a second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be the same as or different from the first transposon end sequence.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be the same as or different from the second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R1 sequence or portion thereof
  • the second sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R2 sequence or portion thereof.
  • the first transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a first complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which first complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the second strand of the double-stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a second complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which second complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the first strand of the double- stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise one or more gaps. In some cases, the one or more gaps may be approximately 9 bp in length each.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., an additional template nucleic acid fragment) may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a sequence hybridized to a primer molecule (e.g., a capture nucleic acid molecule).
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a polyA sequence hybridized to a polyT sequence of a primer molecule.
  • the primer molecule may also comprise an additional primer sequence.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the first template nucleic acid fragment may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., as described herein).
  • the partition may be, for example, a droplet or well.
  • the partition may comprise one or more beads (e.g., as described herein).
  • a bead of the one or more beads may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise one or more of a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), and a sequence configured to hybridize to a splint oligonucleotide.
  • the sequencing primer or portion thereof may be complementary to a sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, and a sequence configured to hybridize to a splint oligonucleotide as described elsewhere herein.
  • a bead of the one or more beads may also comprise a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise one or more of a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), and a sequence configured to hybridize to a splint oligonucleotide as described elsewhere herein.
  • a flow cell adapter sequence e.g., P5 sequence
  • a barcode sequence e.g., a barcode sequence
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), a barcode sequence, and a capture sequence (e.g., a poly T sequence) configured to hybridize to a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., RNA molecule).
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof
  • a barcode sequence e.g., a poly T sequence
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be same.
  • the RNA molecule may be processed to provide the second template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized to provide access to the first and/or second template nucleic acid fragments therein (e.g., as described herein).
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may be generated after the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is lysed or permeabilized.
  • the first and second template nucleic acid fragments may undergo processing within the partition.
  • the gaps in the first template nucleic acid molecule may be filled via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase).
  • the resultant double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand comprising a chromatin sequence flanked by transposon end sequences and/or sequences complementary to transposon end sequences.
  • Each transposon end sequence and/or sequence complementary to transposon end sequence may be linked to a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or a complement thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 sequence or a portion thereof, or a complement thereof).
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may hybridize to a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or a complement thereof, of the single strand.
  • a primer extension reaction may then be used to generate a complement of the single strand (e.g., using a DNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase).
  • Such a process may amount to a linear amplification process. This process incorporates the barcode sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules, or a complement thereof.
  • the resultant double-stranded molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand comprising the flow cell adapter sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; barcode sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; transposon end sequences, and/or complements thereof; second sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof.
  • An additional amplification process may or may not be performed within a partition. For example, exponential amplification may or may not be performed within a partition.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be reverse transcribed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase) to provide a cDNA strand.
  • the reverse transcription process may append a sequence to an end of a strand of the resultant double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the RNA strand and the cDNA strand, such as a polyC sequence.
  • a template switching oligonucleotide may comprise a sequence (e.g., a polyG sequence) that may hybridize to at least a portion of the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule (e.g., to the appended polyC sequence) and be used to further extend the strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule to provide an extended double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • a sequence may comprise ribobases.
  • the template switching oligonucleotide may comprise a UMI sequence, or complement thereof, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof.
  • the extended double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the template switching oligonucleotide and a complement thereof, and the prior double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand comprising a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the UMI sequence, or complement thereof; the poly(C) or poly(G) sequence; the sequence corresponding to the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or complement thereof; and sequences of the capture nucleic acid molecule, or complements thereof.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may hybridize to a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or a complement thereof, of the single strand.
  • a primer extension reaction may then be used to generate a complement of the single strand (e.g., using a DNA polymerase).
  • Such a process may amount to a linear amplification process. This process incorporates the barcode sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules, or a complement thereof.
  • the resultant double-stranded molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand comprising a flow cell adapter sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; a barcode sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; a sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the UMI sequence, or complement thereof; the poly(C) or poly(G) sequence; the sequence corresponding to the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or complement thereof; and sequences of the capture nucleic acid molecule, or complements thereof.
  • An additional amplification process may or may not be performed within a partition. For example, exponential amplification may or may not be performed within a partition.
  • the linear amplification products corresponding to the chromatin and the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus included within the partition of the plurality of partitions may be recovered from the partition.
  • the contents of the plurality of partitions may be pooled to provide the linear amplification products in a bulk solution.
  • the linear amplification product corresponding to the chromatin may then be subjected to conditions sufficient to undergo one or more nucleic acid amplification reactions (e.g., PCR) to generate one or more amplification products corresponding to the chromatin.
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • the linear amplification product corresponding to the RNA molecule may be subjected to fragmentation, end repair, and dA tailing processes.
  • An additional primer sequence e.g., a sequencing primer or portion thereof, such as an R2 sequence
  • a nucleic acid amplification reaction e.g., PCR
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences (see, for example, FIG. 12).
  • in-partition template switching may attach a sequencing primer (e.g., a TruSeq R1 or R2 sequence) to the 3’ or 5’ end of an RNA transcript.
  • a bead e.g., gel bead
  • carrying the sequencing primer, or portion thereof e.g., partial TruSeq R1 or R2 sequence
  • This may allow for differential amplification of DNA (e.g., AT AC) and RNA libraries after removing materials from partitions (e.g., breaking emulsions) and sample splitting.
  • Another advantage of this method is that the same enzyme (e.g. DNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase) may be used to barcode nucleic acid fragments derived from both DNA (e.g., chromatin) and RNA.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1200 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1250 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • two distinct beads e.g., gel beads
  • the same bead e.g., a bead that may be a multifunctional bead
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1204 comprising insert sequence 1208 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1206 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1202 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1210 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1207.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1204 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1204 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1204 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • Gaps 1207 may be filled 1212 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase).
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1216a coupled to a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218a.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1220a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1222a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1202’.
  • Sequence 1202’ may hybridize to sequence 1202 of template nucleic acid fragment 1204, or its complement, and undergo primer extension 1214 to yield a strand comprising sequences 1220a, 1222a, 1202’, 1210, and insert sequence 1208 or a complement thereof.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the strand in bulk solution.
  • This strand may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1224 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1226 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1228 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence).
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • additional sequence 1228 may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence).
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 1258 comprising RNA sequence 1260 and polyA sequence 1262 may be contacted 1264 with primer molecule 1252 comprising polyT sequence 1254 and additional primer sequence 1256.
  • RNA molecule 1258 may then be reverse transcribed 1266 off of polyT sequence 1254 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1268 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1270.
  • Sequence 1268 may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 1272 comprising sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1274, unique molecule identifier sequence or complement thereof 1276, and capture sequence (e.g., polyG sequence) 1278 may then hybridize 1280 to the cDNA molecule and template switching may take place.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1216b coupled to a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1220b (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1222b, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1274’.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 1216b may be the same as bead 1216a such that partition comprises a single bead (e.g., 1218a and 1218b are attached to a single bead).
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218b and nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218a may have the same sequences.
  • Sequence 1274’ may hybridize to sequence 1274 of the cDNA molecule, or its complement, and undergo primer extension 1282 to yield a strand comprising sequences 1220b, 1222b, 1274’, 1276 or a complement thereof, 1268 or a complement thereof, and insert sequence 1270 or a complement thereof.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the strand in bulk solution.
  • This strand may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1284 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1286 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1218b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1288 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1290, a sample index sequence 1292, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 1294.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • FIG. 13 shows another example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1300 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1350 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • two distinct beads e.g., gel beads
  • the same bead e.g., gel bead
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1304 comprising insert sequence 1308 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1306 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1302 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1310 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1307.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1304 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1304 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1304 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • Gaps 1307 may be filled 1312 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase).
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1316a coupled to a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318a.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1320a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1322a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1302’.
  • Sequence 1302’ may hybridize to sequence 1302 of template nucleic acid fragment 1304, or its complement, and undergo primer extension 1314 to yield a strand comprising sequences 1320a, 1322a, 1302’, 1310, and insert sequence 1308 or a complement thereof.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the strand in bulk solution.
  • This strand may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1324 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1326 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1328 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence).
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • additional sequence 1328 may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence).
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 1358 comprising RNA sequence 1360 and polyA sequence 1362 may be contacted with primer molecule 1352 comprising polyT sequence 1354, UMI sequence 1355, and sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence) 1356.
  • RNA molecule 1358 may be reverse transcribed 1364 off of polyT sequence 1354 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1366 (e.g., a polyC sequence) to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1368.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 1370 comprising additional primer sequence 1372 and a homopolymer sequence 1374 (e.g., a polyG) sequence that is complementary to sequence 1366 may then hybridize 1376 to the cDNA molecule and template switching may take place.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1316b coupled to a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1320b (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1322b, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1356’.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 1316b may be the same as bead (e.g., gel bead) 1316a such that partition comprises a single bead (i.e., 1318a and 1318b are attached to a single bead).
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318b and nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318a may have the same sequences.
  • Sequence 1356’ may hybridize to sequence 1356 of the cDNA molecule, or its complement, and undergo primer extension 1378 to yield a strand comprising sequences 1320b, 1322b, 1356’, 1355 or a complement thereof, 1366 or a complement thereof, and insert sequence 1368 or a complement thereof.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the strand in bulk solution.
  • This strand may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1380 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1382 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1318b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1384 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1390, a sample index sequence 1388, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 1386.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising chromatin and one or more RNA molecules is provided.
  • the chromatin in the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed to provide a first template nucleic acid fragment derived from the chromatin (e.g., a tagmented fragment, as described herein).
  • the chromatin may be processed in bulk solution.
  • RNA molecule may be processed to provide a second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule (e.g., as described herein).
  • the RNA molecule may be processed within a partition.
  • the configuration of the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially dependent on the structure of the transposase-nucleic acid complex used to generate the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex such as that shown in FIG. 9 may be used to prepare the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially double-stranded.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a double-stranded region comprising sequences of chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a first end of a first strand of the double- stranded region may be linked to a first transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which first transposon end sequence may be linked to a first sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • a first end of the second strand of the double-stranded region, which end is opposite the first end of the first strand may be linked to a second transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which second transposon end sequence may be linked to a second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be the same as or different from the first transposon end sequence.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be the same as or different from the second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R1 sequence or portion thereof
  • the second sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R2 sequence or portion thereof.
  • the first transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a first complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which first complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the second strand of the double-stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a second complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which second complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the first strand of the double- stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise one or more gaps.
  • the one or more gaps may be approximately 9 bp in length each.
  • one or more gaps may be at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more bp in length.
  • one or more gaps may be at most about 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 bp in length.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a sequence hybridized to a primer molecule (e.g., a capture nucleic acid molecule).
  • a primer molecule e.g., a capture nucleic acid molecule
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a polyA sequence hybridized to a polyT sequence of a primer molecule.
  • the primer molecule may also comprise an additional primer sequence.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the first template nucleic acid fragment may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., The partition may be, for example, a droplet or well.
  • the partition may comprise one or more beads (e.g., as described herein).
  • a bead (e.g., gel bead) of the one or more beads may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof).
  • the sequencing primer or portion thereof may be complementary to a sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the flow cell adapter sequence and/or barcode sequence may be hybridized to their complementary sequences.
  • a bead (e.g., gel bead) of the one or more beads may also comprise a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), a UMI sequence, and a capture sequence (e.g., a polyG sequence, a polydT sequence or target specific sequence).
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be coupled to the same bead, and the partition may comprise a single bead.
  • the RNA molecule may be processed to provide the second template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized to provide access to the first and/or second template nucleic acid fragments therein.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may be generated after the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is lysed or permeabilized.
  • the first and second template nucleic acid fragments may undergo processing within the partition.
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the first template nucleic acid fragment corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may hybridize to a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the sequencing primer or portion thereof of the nucleic acid barcode molecule may then be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) to a transposon end sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment, or a complement thereof to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be reverse transcribed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase) to provide a cDNA strand.
  • the reverse transcription process may append a sequence to an end of a strand of the resultant double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the RNA strand and the cDNA strand, such as a polyC sequence.
  • the capture sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may hybridize to the appended sequence (e.g., polyC sequence) of the double- stranded nucleic acid molecule and a template switching process may take place to provide an extended double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • a sequence may comprise ribobases.
  • the sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be considered a template switching oligonucleotide. Accordingly, barcoding and template switching may take place contemporaneously to provide a barcoded cDNA molecule.
  • the cDNA strand of the barcoded cDNA molecule may comprise the polyC sequence, a sequence complementary to the sequence of the template switch oligonucleotide or a portion thereof (e.g., sequences complementary to the sequencing primer, barcode sequence, and UMI sequence of the template switch oligonucleotide), the cDNA sequence, the polyT sequence, and the additional primer sequence of the primer molecule.
  • the RNA strand of the barcoded cDNA molecule may comprise the sequence of the template switch oligonucleotide, the mRNA sequence, and a sequence complementary to the additional primer sequence of the primer molecule.
  • the partially double-stranded molecule corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus included within the partition (e.g., droplet or well) of the plurality of partitions may be recovered from the partition.
  • the contents of the plurality of partitions may be pooled to provide these products in a bulk solution.
  • the gaps in the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin may be filled using via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase).
  • the gap filling extension process may not include strand displacement.
  • the resultant gap-filled double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand, which single strand may be subjected to conditions sufficient to perform one or more nucleic acid amplification reactions (e.g., PCR) to generate amplification products corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule may be subjected to fragmentation, end repair, a dA tailing process, tagmentation, or a combination thereof.
  • An additional primer sequence e.g., a sequencing primer or portion thereof, such as an R2 sequence
  • a nucleic acid amplification reaction e.g., PCR
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • FIG. 14 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1400 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1450 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1404 comprising insert sequence 1408 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1406 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1402 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1410 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1407.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1404 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1404 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1404 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1416 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 1418a and 1418b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1420a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1422a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1402’. Sequences 1420a and 1422a may be hybridized to complementary sequences 1420’ and 1422’, respectively.
  • Sequence 1402’ may hybridize to sequence 1402 of template nucleic acid fragment 1404, or its complement, and sequence 1422’ may be ligated 1412 to sequence 1402 of template nucleic acid fragment 1404.
  • template nucleic acid fragment 1404 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation (e.g., ATAC) reaction and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1404 in bulk solution.
  • gaps 1407 may be filled 1424 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1426 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1428 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1430 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule 1458 comprising RNA sequence 1460 and polyA sequence 1462 may be contacted 1464 with primer molecule 1452 comprising polyT sequence 1454 and additional primer sequence 1456. RNA molecule 1458 may then be reverse transcribed 1476 off of polyT sequence 1454 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1470 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1468. Sequence 1470 may be a polyC sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1420b (e.g., aP5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1422b, UMI sequence 1472, and a sequence 1474 complementary to sequence 1470 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • a flow cell adapter sequence 1420b e.g., aP5 sequence
  • barcode sequence 1422b e.g., UMI sequence 1472
  • sequence 1474 complementary to sequence 1470 e.g., a polyG sequence
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1420b (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1422b, UMI sequence 1472, and a template switching sequence 1474 complementary to sequence 1470 (e.g., a polyG sequence). Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418b may be used to perform template switching 1478, which process may also result in the generation of a barcoded cDNA molecule. The contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the barcoded cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • a sequencing primer sequence 1420b e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence
  • barcode sequence 1422b e.g., UMI sequence 1472
  • a template switching sequence 1474 complementary to sequence 1470
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418b may be used to perform template switching 1478, which process may also result in the generation of a barcode
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1480 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1484 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1418b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1486, and an additional sequence 1488 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1490, a sample index sequence 1492, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 1494.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • FIG. 15 shows another example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1500 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1550 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1504 comprising insert sequence 1508 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1506 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1502 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1510 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1507.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1504 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1504 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1504 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1516 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 1518a and 1518b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1520a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1522a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1502’. Sequences 1520a and 1522a may be hybridized to complementary sequences 1520’ and 1522’, respectively.
  • Sequence 1502’ may hybridize to sequence 1502 of template nucleic acid fragment 1504, or its complement, and sequence 1522’ may be ligated 1512 to sequence 1502 of template nucleic acid fragment 1504.
  • template nucleic acid fragment 1504 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation (e.g., ATAC) reaction and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1504 in bulk solution.
  • gaps 1507 may be filled 1524 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1526 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1528 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1530 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • RNA molecule 1558 comprising RNA sequence 1560 and polyA sequence 1562 and bead (e.g., gel bead) 1516 may be provided within a partition.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 1516 (e.g., the same bead described in panel 1500) may be included within the partition and may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1568 (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1522b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1522a), UMI sequence 1566, and a polyT sequence 1564 complementary to polyA sequence 1562.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1568 (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1522b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1522a), UMI sequence 1566, and a polyT sequence 1564 complementary to polyA sequence 1562.
  • PolyT sequence 1564 may hybridize to polyA sequence 1562 of RNA molecule 1558.
  • RNA molecule 1558 may be reverse transcribed 1570 off of polyT sequence 1564 to provide an cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1572.
  • the reverse transcription process may use a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1574 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1572.
  • Sequence 1574 may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 1578 comprising a primer sequence 1580 and a sequence complementary to sequence 1574 (e.g., a polyG sequence) may hybridize to the cDNA molecule and facilitate a template switching reaction onto template switch oligonucleotide 1578.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1584. Additional amplification (e.g., PCR) 1586 may to performed to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1588 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1518b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1598 (e.g., a P7 sequence), and an additional sequence 1590 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1596, a sample index sequence 1594, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence) 1592.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising chromatin and one or more RNA molecules is provided.
  • the chromatin in the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed to provide a first template nucleic acid fragment derived from the chromatin (e.g., a tagmented fragment, as described herein).
  • the chromatin may be processed in bulk solution.
  • RNA molecule may be processed to provide a second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule (e.g., an additional nucleic acid fragment, as described herein).
  • the RNA molecule may be processed within a partition.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule may be processed according to the preceding examples.
  • the configuration of the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially dependent on the structure of the transposase-nucleic acid complex used to generate the first template nucleic acid fragment. For example, a transposase-nucleic acid complex such as that shown in FIG. 9 may be used to prepare the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the polarities of the transposase-nucleic acid may be reversed such that sequencing primers (e.g., R1 and R2 sequencing primers) are not directly linked to the chromatin (see, e.g., FIG. 17).
  • sequencing primers e.g., R1 and R2 sequencing primers
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially double-stranded.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a double-stranded region comprising sequences of chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a first end of a first strand of the double-stranded region may be linked to a first transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence).
  • a first end of the second strand of the double-stranded region, which end is opposite the first end of the first strand, may be linked to a second transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence).
  • the second transposon end sequence may be the same as or different from the first transposon end sequence.
  • the first transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a first complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which first complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the second strand of the double- stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first complementary sequence may be linked to a first sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a second complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which second complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the first strand of the double-stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the second complementary sequence may be linked to a second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise one or more gaps.
  • the one or more gaps may be approximately 9 bp in length each.
  • one or more gaps may be at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more bp in length.
  • one or more gaps may be at most about 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 bp in length.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be the same as or different from the second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R1 sequence or portion thereof
  • the second sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R2 sequence or portion thereof.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the first template nucleic acid fragment may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., as described herein).
  • the partition may be, for example, a droplet or well.
  • the partition may comprise one or more beads (e.g., as described herein).
  • a bead (e.g., gel bead) of the one or more beads may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof).
  • the sequencing primer or portion thereof may be complementary to a sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the flow cell adapter sequence and/or barcode sequence may be hybridized to their complementary sequences.
  • the same bead or another bead may comprise a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 sequence or portion thereof, or complement thereof), a barcode sequence, a unique molecular identifier sequence, and a capture sequence.
  • the RNA molecule may be processed to provide the second template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., as described herein).
  • the RNA molecule e.g., mRNA molecule
  • a primer molecule comprising a first primer sequence (e.g., a polyT sequence) and an additional primer sequence.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized to provide access to the first and/or second template nucleic acid fragments therein (e.g., as described herein).
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may be generated after the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is lysed or permeabilized.
  • the first and second template nucleic acid fragments may undergo processing within the partition.
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the first template nucleic acid fragment corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may hybridize to a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the sequencing primer or portion thereof of the nucleic acid barcode molecule may then be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) to a transposon end sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment, or a complement thereof to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment corresponding to the RNA molecule may be reverse transcribed using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append a sequence (e.g., a polyC sequence) to the cDNA strand of the resultant cDNA molecule.
  • the cDNA molecule may then be contacted with a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules that may be a template switch oligonucleotide.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 sequence or portion thereof, or complement thereof), a barcode sequence, a unique molecular identifier sequence, and a capture sequence.
  • the capture sequence may be a sequence that is complementary to the sequence appended to the cDNA strand (e.g., a polyG sequence). Template switching and barcoding may then take place to provide a barcoded cDNA molecule.
  • the partially double-stranded molecule corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule (e.g., prepared as described above) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus included within the partition of the plurality of partitions may be recovered from the partition.
  • the contents of the plurality of partitions may be pooled to provide the linear amplification products in a bulk solution.
  • the gaps in the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin may be filled using via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • the resultant gap-filled double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand, which single strand may be subjected to conditions sufficient to perform one or more nucleic acid amplification reactions (e.g., PCR) to generate amplification products corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule may also be processed and amplified according to the preceding examples. [00182] FIG. 16 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1600 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1650 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1604 comprising insert sequence 1608 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1606 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1602 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1610 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1607.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1604 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1604 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1604 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1616 coupled to a nucleic acid barcode molecules 1618a and 1618b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1620a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1622a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1602’. Sequence 1602’ may hybridize to sequence 1602 of template nucleic acid fragment 1604, or its complement.
  • Sequence 1602’ may then be ligated 1612 to a transposon end sequence 1606 of template nucleic acid fragment 1604.
  • 1604 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation (e.g., ATAC) reaction and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell beads or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction. For example, less than 95U of PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1604 in bulk solution.
  • gaps 1607 may be filled 1614 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) and the molecule extended from sequence 1602 to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1624 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1626 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1628 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule 1658 comprising RNA sequence 1660 and polyA sequence 1662 may be contacted 1664 with primer molecule 1652 comprising polyT sequence 1654 and additional primer sequence 1656. RNA molecule 1658 may then be reverse transcribed 1676 off of polyT sequence 1654 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1670 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1668. Sequence 1670 may be a polyC sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1620b (e.g., aP5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1622b, UMI sequence 1672, and a sequence 1674 complementary to sequence 1670 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • a flow cell adapter sequence 1620b e.g., aP5 sequence
  • barcode sequence 1622b e.g., UMI sequence 1672
  • sequence 1674 complementary to sequence 1670 e.g., a polyG sequence
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1620b (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1622b, UMI sequence 1672, and a template switching sequence 1674 complementary to sequence 1670 (e.g., a polyG sequence). Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618b may be used to perform template switching 1678, which process may also result in the generation of a barcoded cDNA molecule. The contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the barcoded cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • a sequencing primer sequence 1620b e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence
  • barcode sequence 1622b e.g., UMI sequence 1672
  • a template switching sequence 1674 complementary to sequence 1670
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618b may be used to perform template switching 1678, which process may also result in the generation of a barcode
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1680 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1684 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1618b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1686, and an additional sequence 1688 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1690, a sample index sequence 1692, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 1694.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • FIG. 17 shows another example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1700 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1750 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1704 comprising insert sequence 1708 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1706 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1702 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1710 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1707.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1704 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1704 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1704 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1716 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 1718a and 1718b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1720a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1722a, and a sequencing primer or portion thereof or complement thereof 1702’. Sequence 1702’ may hybridize to sequence 1702 of template nucleic acid fragment 1704, or its complement.
  • Sequence 1702’ may then be ligated 1712 to a transposon end sequence 1706 of template nucleic acid fragment 1704.
  • 1704 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation reaction (e.g., ATAC) and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction. For example, less than 95U of PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double- stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1704 in bulk solution.
  • gaps 1707 may be filled 1714 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) and the molecule extended from sequence 1702 to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1724 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1726 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1728 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 1758 comprising RNA sequence 1760 and polyA sequence 1762 and bead (e.g., gel bead) 1716 may be provided within a partition.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 1716 (e.g., the same bead described in panel 1700) may be included within the partition and may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1768 (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1722b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1722a), UMI sequence 1766, and a polyT sequence 1764 complementary to polyA sequence 1762.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1768 (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1722b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1722a), UMI sequence 1766, and a polyT sequence 1764 complementary to polyA sequence 1762.
  • PolyT sequence 1764 may hybridize to polyA sequence 1762 of RNA molecule 1758.
  • RNA molecule 1758 may be reverse transcribed 1770 off of polyT sequence 1764 to provide an cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1772.
  • the reverse transcription process may use a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1774 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1772.
  • Sequence 1774 may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 1778 comprising a primer sequence 1780 and a sequence complementary to sequence 1774 (e.g., a polyG sequence) may hybridize to the cDNA molecule.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1784. Additional amplification (e.g., PCR) 1786 may to performed to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1788 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1718b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1798 (e.g., a P7 sequence), and an additional sequence 1790 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1796, a sample index sequence 1794, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence) 1792.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/
  • a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising chromatin and one or more RNA molecules is provided.
  • the chromatin in the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed to provide a first template nucleic acid fragment derived from the chromatin (e.g., a tagmented fragment, as described herein).
  • the chromatin may be processed in bulk solution.
  • An RNA molecule may be processed to provide a second template nucleic acid fragment derived from an RNA molecule (e.g., as described herein).
  • the RNA molecule may be processed within a partition.
  • the configuration of the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially dependent on the structure of the transposase-nucleic acid complex used to generate the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex such as that shown in FIG. 9 may be used to prepare the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may be at least partially double-stranded.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a double-stranded region comprising sequences of chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a first end of a first strand of the double- stranded region may be linked to a first transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which first transposon end sequence may be linked to a first sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • a first end of the second strand of the double-stranded region, which end is opposite the first end of the first strand may be linked to a second transposon end sequence (e.g., mosaic end sequence), which second transposon end sequence may be linked to a second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be the same as or different from the first transposon end sequence.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be the same as or different from the second sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the first sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R1 sequence or portion thereof
  • the second sequencing primer or portion thereof may be an R2 sequence or portion thereof.
  • the first transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a first complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which first complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the second strand of the double-stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the second transposon end sequence may be hybridized to a second complementary sequence (e.g., mosaic end reverse complement sequence), which second complementary sequence may not be linked to a second end of the first strand of the double- stranded region of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the first template nucleic acid fragment may comprise one or more gaps.
  • the one or more gaps may be approximately 9 bp in length each.
  • one or more gaps may be at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more bp in length.
  • one or more gaps may be at most about 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 bp in length.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a sequence hybridized to a primer molecule (e.g., a capture nucleic acid molecule).
  • a primer molecule e.g., a capture nucleic acid molecule
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may comprise a sequence of an RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and a polyA sequence hybridized to a polyT sequence of a primer molecule.
  • the primer molecule may also comprise an additional primer sequence.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the first template nucleic acid fragment may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., as described herein).
  • the partition may be, for example, a droplet or well.
  • the partition may comprise one or more beads (e.g., as described herein).
  • a bead (e.g., gel bead) of the one or more beads may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, and an overhang sequence.
  • the partition may also comprise a splint sequence comprising a sequence complementary to the overhang sequence and a sequencing primer or portion thereof that may be complementary to a sequence of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • a bead of the one or more beads may also comprise a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., P5 sequence), a barcode sequence, a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), a UMI sequence, and a capture sequence (e.g., a polyG sequence or a polydT sequence).
  • a flow cell adapter sequence e.g., P5 sequence
  • a barcode sequence e.g., a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., R1 sequence or portion thereof, or a complement thereof), a UMI sequence, and a capture sequence (e.g., a polyG sequence or a polydT sequence).
  • the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules and the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be coupled to the same bead, and the partition may comprise a single bead.
  • the RNA molecule may be processed to provide the second template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized to provide access to the first and/or second template nucleic acid fragments therein (e.g., as described herein).
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment may be generated after the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is lysed or permeabilized.
  • the first and second template nucleic acid fragments may undergo processing within the partition.
  • a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the first template nucleic acid fragment corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may hybridize to a complementary sequence of the sequencing primer or portion thereof in the splint sequence.
  • the splint sequence may also hybridize to the overhang sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the overhang sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule may then be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) to a sequencing primer or portion thereof of the first template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the resultant partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may comprise the barcode sequence as well as one or more gaps.
  • the second template nucleic acid fragment derived from the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be reverse transcribed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase) to provide a cDNA strand.
  • the reverse transcription process may append a sequence to an end of a strand of the resultant double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the RNA strand and the cDNA strand, such as a polyC sequence.
  • the capture sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may hybridize to the appended sequence (e.g., polyC sequence) of the double- stranded nucleic acid molecule and a template switching process may take place to provide a second double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • the sequence of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be considered a template switching oligonucleotide.
  • the template switch process may result in a barcoded cDNA molecule.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may comprise the sequencing primer or portion thereof, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the barcode sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the UMI sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the capture sequence, or complement thereof, of the nucleic acid barcode molecule of the second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules; the poly(C) or poly(G) sequence; the sequence corresponding to the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or complement thereof; and sequences of the capture nucleic acid molecule, or complements thereof.
  • the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus and the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus included within the partition of the plurality of partitions may be recovered from the partition.
  • the contents of the plurality of partitions may be pooled to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule and the barcoded cDNA molecule in a bulk solution.
  • the gaps in the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule corresponding to the chromatin may be filled using via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase).
  • the DNA polymerase may lack strand displacement activity.
  • the resultant gap-filled double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be denatured to provide a single strand, which single strand may be subjected to conditions sufficient to perform one or more nucleic acid amplification reactions (e.g., PCR) to generate amplification products corresponding to the chromatin of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule corresponding to the RNA molecule may be subjected to fragmentation, end repair, a dA tailing process, tagmentation, or a combination thereof.
  • An additional primer sequence e.g., a sequencing primer or portion thereof, such as an R2 sequence
  • a nucleic acid amplification reaction e.g., PCR
  • a nucleic acid amplification process may incorporate one or more additional sequences, such as one or more additional flow cell adapter sequences.
  • FIG. 18 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1800 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1850 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1804 comprising insert sequence 1808 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1806 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1802 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1810 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1807.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1804 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1804 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1804 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may comprise splint sequence 1812, which splint sequence may comprise a first sequence 1802’ that is complementary to sequencing primer or portion thereof 1802 and a second sequence 1824.
  • Sequence 1824 may comprise a blocking group (e.g., a 3’ blocking group), which blocking group may prevent extension by reverse transcription.
  • the partition may also include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1816 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 1818a and 1812b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1820a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1822a, and an overhang sequence 1824’ that is complementary to sequence 1824 of the splint sequence. Sequence 1824 may hybridize to sequence 1824’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the sequences of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a and the template nucleic acid fragment 1804. Sequence 1824’ of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) 1826 to sequence 1802 of template nucleic acid fragment 1804.
  • a flow cell adapter sequence 1820a e.g., a P5 sequence
  • Sequence 1824 may hybridize to sequence 1824’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the sequences of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a and the template nucleic acid fragment 1804.
  • 1804 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK polynucleotide kinase
  • T4 PNK polynucleotide kinase
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation reaction (e.g., ATAC) and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction. For example, less than 95U of PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1804 in bulk solution.
  • bulk solution gaps 1807 may be filled 1828 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1830 to provide a double- stranded amplification product 1832 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1834 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 1858 comprising RNA sequence 1860 and polyA sequence 1862 may be contacted 1864 with primer molecule 1852 comprising polyT sequence 1854 and additional primer sequence 1856.
  • RNA molecule 1858 may then be reverse transcribed 1876 off of polyT sequence 1854 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1870 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1868.
  • Sequence 1870 may be a polyC sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1820b (e.g., aP5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1822b, UMI sequence 1872, and a sequence 1874 complementary to sequence 1870 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • a flow cell adapter sequence 1820b e.g., aP5 sequence
  • barcode sequence 1822b e.g., UMI sequence 1872
  • sequence 1874 complementary to sequence 1870 e.g., a polyG sequence
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1820b (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1822b, UMI sequence 1872, and a sequence 1874 complementary to sequence 1870 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818b may be used to perform template switching 1878, which process may also result in the generation of a barcoded cDNA molecule.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the barcoded cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1880 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1884 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1818b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1886, and an additional sequence 1888 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1890, a sample index sequence 1892, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 1894.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • FIG. 19 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 1900 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 1950 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 1904 comprising insert sequence 1908 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 1906 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 1902 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 1910 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 1907.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 1904 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., a droplet or well, as described herein).
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 1904 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 1904 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • the partition may comprise splint sequence 1912, which splint sequence may comprise a first sequence 1902’ that is complementary to sequencing primer or portion thereof 1902 and a second sequence 1924.
  • Sequence 1924 may comprise a blocking group (e.g., a 3’ blocking group), which blocking group may prevent extension by reverse transcription.
  • the partition may also include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 1916 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 1918a and 1918b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1920a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1922a, and an overhang sequence 1924’ that is complementary to sequence 1924 of the splint sequence. Sequence 1924 may hybridize to sequence 1924’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the sequences of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a and the template nucleic acid fragment 1904. Sequence 1924’ of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) 1926 to sequence 1902 of template nucleic acid fragment 1904.
  • a flow cell adapter sequence 1920a e.g., a P5 sequence
  • Sequence 1924 may hybridize to sequence 1924’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the sequences of nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a and the template nucleic acid fragment 1904.
  • 1904 may be phosphorylated using a suitable kinase enzyme (e.g., polynucleotide kinase (PNK), such as T4 PNK).
  • PNK polynucleotide kinase
  • T4 PNK polynucleotide kinase
  • PNK and ATP may be added in bulk in the tagmentation reaction (e.g., ATAC) and/or prior to partitioning the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, or plurality thereof. 15U of PNK with ImM of ATP may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction. For example, less than 95U of PNK may be spiked into the tagmentation reaction.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a attached to template nucleic acid fragment 1904 in bulk solution.
  • bulk solution gaps 1907 may be filled 1928 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1930 to provide a double- stranded amplification product 1932 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 1934 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 1958 comprising RNA sequence 1960 and polyA sequence 1962 and bead (e.g., gel bead) 1916 may be provided within a partition.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 1916 (e.g., the same bead described in panel 1900) may be included within the partition and may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 1968 (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 1922b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1922a), UMI sequence 1966, and a polyT sequence 1964 complementary to polyA sequence 1962.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 1968 (e.g., a R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 1922b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 1922a), UMI sequence 1966, and a polyT sequence 1964 complementary to polyA sequence 1962.
  • PolyT sequence 1964 may hybridize to polyA sequence 1962 of RNA molecule 1958.
  • RNA molecule 1958 may be reverse transcribed 1970 off of polyT sequence 1964 to provide an cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1972.
  • the reverse transcription process may use a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 1974 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 1972.
  • Sequence 1974 may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 1978 comprising a primer sequence 1980 and a sequence complementary to sequence 1974 (e.g., a polyG sequence) may hybridize to the cDNA molecule.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 1984. Additional amplification (e.g., PCR) 1986 may to performed to provide a double-stranded amplification product 1988 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1998 (e.g., a P7 sequence), and an additional sequence 1990 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1996, a sample index sequence 1994, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence) 1992.
  • amplification product 1988 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1918b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 1998 (e.g., a P7 sequence), and an additional sequence 1990 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 1996, a sample index sequence
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • a biological sample e.g., a nucleic acid sample
  • the method may comprise performing sequential transcription and reverse transcription processes within a partition.
  • the method may comprise providing a partition (e.g., droplet or well) of a plurality of partitions comprising a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA molecule) derived from a nucleic acid sample.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be transcribed (e.g., using a transcriptase) to provide an RNA molecule.
  • the RNA molecule may then be reverse transcribed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase) within the partition to generate a complementary DNA (cDNA) molecule.
  • the cDNA molecule may undergo further processing within the partition to provide a derivative of the cDNA molecule.
  • the cDNA molecule or derivative thereof may be recovered from the partition (e.g., by pooling the contents of the plurality of partitions).
  • the partition may be a well among a plurality of wells.
  • the partition may be a droplet among a plurality of droplets.
  • a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA molecule) processed according to the method provided herein may derive from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be included within the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be chromatin.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the nucleic acid molecule may be included within the partition.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents (e.g., as described herein) into a partition (e.g., droplet or well).
  • a nucleic acid molecule processed according to the method provided herein may be a DNA molecule, such as chromatin.
  • the method may further comprise processing an open chromatin structure of the nucleic acid sample with a transposase (e.g., included within a transposase-nucleic acid complex) to provide the nucleic acid molecule.
  • a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus) may be contacted with a transposase-nucleic acid complex (e.g., as described herein).
  • a transposase used in such a process may be, for example, a Tn5 transposase.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may have a structure such as that of FIG. 9 or FIG. 10.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may comprise one or more transposon end oligonucleotide molecules, which transposon end oligonucleotide molecules comprise hairpin molecules.
  • FIG. 11 An example of such a transposase- nucleic acid complex is shown in FIG. 11.
  • a nucleic acid molecule processed using a transposase-nucleic acid complex comprising one or more hairpin molecules may be a tagmented fragment comprising a double- stranded region comprising sequences corresponding to the nucleic acid molecule (e.g., chromatin) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus from which it originates or is derived, as well as one or more hairpin molecules appended to either end of the double-stranded region.
  • the double-stranded region may comprise a first hairpin molecule at one end and a second hairpin molecule at a second end.
  • a hairpin molecule may be attached to the double-stranded region, such that the tagmented fragment comprises a gap at either end.
  • a hairpin molecule may be attached to a 3’ end of the double-stranded region.
  • the hairpin molecule may comprise a promoter sequence, such as a T7 promoter sequence, and/or a UMI sequence.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may undergo a gap filling process with a reverse transcriptase.
  • the reverse transcriptase enzyme may be a mutant reverse transcriptase enzyme such as, but not limited to, Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus (MMLV) reverse transcriptase.
  • MMLV Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus
  • the reverse transcriptase is a mutant MMLV reverse transcriptase such as, but not limited to, enzyme “42B” (see, US Patent Publication No. 20180312822).
  • Enzyme 42B may demonstrated to reduce inhibition of reverse transcription of mRNAs from a single cell due to one or more unknown components present in cell lysate of the single cell when prepared in reaction volumes ofless than I nanoliter (nL). Enzyme 42B as compared to a commercially available mutant MMLV RT enzyme (CA-MMLV) may show improved reverse transcriptase activity.
  • CA-MMLV mutant MMLV RT enzyme
  • Such a process may generate a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the double-stranded region corresponding to the nucleic acid molecule (e.g., chromatin) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus from which it is derived, the sequences of the hairpin molecules at either end of the double-stranded region, and sequences complementary to the sequences of the hairpin molecules.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may then undergo transcription with a T7 polymerase, which process begins at an end of a T7 promoter sequences of a hairpin molecules.
  • Both strands may be transcribed in this manner to provide two nucleic acid strands each comprising the T7 promoter sequence, and a complement thereof; one or more transposon end sequences, and one or more complements thereof; and a sequence of the original nucleic acid molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the strands may also comprise one or more spacer, UMI, or other sequences (e.g., from the hairpin molecules).
  • a strand may then undergo a self-priming process in which the transposon end sequence and complement thereof of a hairpin molecule hybridize to one another to regenerate a hairpin molecule at an end of the strand.
  • the hairpin molecule may serve as the priming site for reverse transcription.
  • a reverse transcriptase process may then be performed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase).
  • a sequence may be appended to the end of the molecule, which sequence may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switching oligonucleotide comprising a sequence complementary to the appended sequence e.g., a polyG sequence
  • the template switching oligonucleotide may comprise a UMI sequence (e.g., a second UMI sequence that may index transcripts that undergo template switching), a barcode sequence, and/or a priming sequence such as a sequencing primer sequence or portion thereof (e.g., an R1 or R2 sequence, or portion thereof).
  • the template switching oligonucleotide may be attached to a bead (e.g., a gel bead) included within the partition.
  • the template switching oligonucleotide may be a nucleic acid barcode molecule of a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules attached to the bead (e.g., as described herein).
  • the resultant partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may comprise a hairpin moiety; sequences corresponding to the original nucleic acid molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus; and the sequences of the template switching oligonucleotide, including a barcode sequence (see, e.g., FIG. 20).
  • the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be released from the partition (e.g., droplet or well). Releasing materials from the partition may comprise breaking or disrupting a droplet.
  • the contents of multiple partitions of the plurality of partitions may be pooled together to provide a bulk solution for further processing.
  • Nucleic acid molecules (e.g., partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule) of the partitions of the plurality of partitions may each be differentially barcoded such that the nucleic acid molecule of each such partition comprises a different barcode sequence.
  • the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may be partially denatured to provide a single-stranded molecule (e.g., a single-stranded cDNA molecule).
  • An RNase treatment may be used to remove the hairpin molecule as well as the shorter strand (e.g., the RNA sequence) of the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • the single-stranded molecule remaining may include the template switching oligonucleotide comprising the barcode sequence and, optionally, UMI sequence.
  • a primer molecule comprising a priming sequence complementary to the priming sequence of the template switching oligonucleotide may be provided and may hybridize to the priming sequence of the template switching oligonucleotide.
  • the priming sequence of the primer molecule may be a 5’- blocked priming sequence.
  • a polymerase with dA tailing activity e.g., a Klenow fragment having 5’ 3’ polymerase activity, such as an exo-Klenow fragment lacking exonuclease activity
  • the resultant second strand may be dA tailed.
  • the first strand may also be dA tailed.
  • a priming sequence comprising a sequencing primer (e.g., an R1 sequence or complement thereof) and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence or complement thereof) may hybridize to a complementary sequence of the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • the dA moiety appended to the end of the second strand may serve as a site for hybridization of a priming sequence comprising a dT moiety at an end, a sequencing primer (e.g., an R2 sequence or complement thereof), and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence or complement thereof).
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may then be subjected to conditions sufficient to perform one or more nucleic acid amplification reactions (e.g., PCR) to provide amplification products corresponding to the original nucleic acid molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the amplification products may comprise flow cell adapter sequences (e.g., P5 and P7 sequences) at either end to facilitate sequencing (e.g., as described herein).
  • the method provided herein may overcome certain challenges of performing reverse transcription within partitions.
  • reverse transcriptase may have a DNA-dependent DNA polymerase activity, and/or terminal transferase activities. The latter may result in generation of variable overhangs under certain reaction conditions.
  • every insertion site may be provided a T7 promoter, averting losses that may otherwise be encountered via Rl-Rl and R2-R2 interactions.
  • both mRNA and chromatin- derived fragments may be barcoded using the same biochemistry (e.g., RT template switching).
  • Performance of linear amplification of both such strands of a nucleic acid molecule may provide strand awareness and introduce a new dimension for, e.g., ATAC-seq processes. Further, this method may enable isothermal linear amplification of transposase derived nucleic acid fragments within partitions. Notably, this method may be combined with any of the RNA workflows described elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 20 shows a workflow 2000 corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Workflow 2000 may be performed in parallel with an RNA workflow, such as an RNA workflow of any of FIGs. 12-19.
  • Multiple beads each comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules configured for analysis of DNA or RNA molecules, may be included within a partition.
  • a single bead e.g., gel bead
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules configured for analysis of both DNA and RNA molecules e.g., as described herein
  • the single bead (e.g., in a single partition) comprises a plurality of identical nucleic acid barcode molecules for both RNA and DNA analysis.
  • the single bead (e.g., within a single partition) may comprise a first plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules for DNA analysis and a second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules for RNA molecules, where the first and second plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprise a common barcode sequence.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 2002 may be prepared (e.g., using a transposase-nucleic acid complex such as that shown in FIG. 11) and provided in a partition (as described herein). Template nucleic acid fragment 2002 may comprise hairpin moieties 2003 and 2004 and target sequences 2005 and 2006. Template nucleic acid fragment 2002 also comprises gaps 2007.
  • Gaps 2007 may be filled using a reverse transcriptase (e.g., a 42B enzyme), which process may result in the generation of a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising the double-stranded region corresponding to the original nucleic acid molecule (e.g., chromatin) of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising sequences 2005 and 2006 and sequences of the hairpin molecules 2003 and 2004.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may comprise transposon end sequences 2008, promoter (e.g., T7 promoter) sequences 2010, and UMI sequences 2012.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may then undergo transcription with a T7 polymerase, which process begins at an end of a T7 promoter sequences of a hairpin molecule. Both strands may be transcribed in this manner to provide two nucleic acid strands.
  • FIG. 20 shows one such strand comprising T7 promoter sequence 2010, and a complement thereof; one or more transposon end sequences 2008, and one or more complements thereof; UMI sequence 2012, and a complement of a UMI sequence; and an RNA sequence 2006’ corresponding to sequence 2006 of the original nucleic acid molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the strand may then undergo a self-priming process in which the transposon end sequence and complement thereof of hairpin molecule 2004 hybridize to one another to regenerate a hairpin molecule at an end of the strand.
  • Regenerated hairpin molecule 2004 may serve as the priming site for reverse transcription.
  • Reverse transcription and template switching may then be performed (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase).
  • the reverse transcription process may append sequence 2014 (e.g., a polyC sequence) to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 2026 and sequences 2012’ and 2008’ that are complementary to sequences 2012 and 2008, respectively.
  • the template switching process may comprise the use of a template switch oligonucleotide coupled to bead (e.g., gel bead) 2016 included within the partition.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 2016 may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecule 2018 that is the template switch oligonucleotide that comprises sequencing primer or portion thereof 2020, barcode sequence 2022, UMI sequence 2024, and a sequence 2014’ that is complementary to sequence 2014 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • the resultant cDNA molecule may comprise a first strand comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 2018 and RNA sequence 2006’ and a second strand comprising cDNA sequence 2026, appended sequence 2014, and sequences 2020’, 2022’, and 2024’ that are complementary to sequences 2020, 2022, and 2024, respectively.
  • the cDNA molecule may be released from the partition (e.g., droplet or well). Releasing materials from the partition may comprise breaking or disrupting a droplet. The contents of multiple partitions of the plurality of partitions may be pooled together to provide a bulk solution for further processing. Outside of the partition, the cDNA molecule may be treated with RNase to remove the hairpin molecule as well as the shorter strand (e.g., the RNA sequence) of the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule. The single-stranded molecule remaining may include sequences 2020’, 2022’, 2024’, 2014, 2012’, 2008’, and 2026. Primer molecule 2028 may then hybridize to sequence 2020’.
  • Primer molecule 2028 may be a 5’- blocked priming sequence.
  • a polymerase with dA tailing activity e.g., a Klenow fragment having 5’ 3’ polymerase activity, such as an exo-Klenow fragment lacking exonuclease activity
  • the resultant second strand may be dA tailed.
  • the first strand may also be dA tailed at an end of sequence 2020’.
  • a 5’-blocking priming sequence is used in the preceding processes, the dA tail appended to the first strand may not be available as a hybridization site for another moiety.
  • a priming sequence 2030 comprising a dT moiety, a sequencing primer (e.g., an R2 sequence or complement thereof) 2032 and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence or complement thereof) 2034 may hybridize to the dA moiety of the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • a priming sequence 2036 comprising a sequencing primer (e.g., an R1 sequence or complement thereof) 2038 and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence or complement thereof) 2040 may hybridize to sequence 2028 of the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may then be amplified to provide amplified product 2042, which amplification product may be subjected to further processing such as nucleic acid sequencing.
  • FIG. 21 provides an overview of a workflow 2100 for processing a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., a nucleic acid molecule included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus).
  • the nucleic acid molecule e.g., DNA molecule, such as chromatin
  • the tagmented fragment then undergoes transcription, reverse transcription, and barcoding within a partition (e.g., as described herein).
  • the resultant products are released from the partition and subjected to one of two processes, the first of which provides an ATAC library and the second of which provides a gene expression library.
  • the first process may involve RNase treatment to remove RNA and provide cDNA, dA tailing and ligation of a sequencing primer, and PCR.
  • the second process may involve cDNA amplification; fragmentation, dA tailing, and ligation of a sequencing primer; and PCR.
  • the present disclosure also provides a method of processing a nucleic acid molecule of a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus using a reverse transcriptase fill-in process coupled with a barcoding process.
  • the nucleic acid molecule e.g., DNA molecule
  • the nucleic acid molecule may derive from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be included within the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be chromatin.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising the nucleic acid molecule may be included within the partition.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents (e.g., as described herein) into a partition (e.g., droplet or well).
  • a partition e.g., droplet or well.
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized (e.g., within a partition) to provide access to the nucleic acid molecule therein (e.g., as described herein).
  • a nucleic acid molecule processed according to the method provided herein may be a DNA molecule, such as chromatin.
  • the method may further comprise processing an open chromatin structure of the nucleic acid sample with a transposase (e.g., included within a transposase-nucleic acid complex) to provide the nucleic acid molecule.
  • a nucleic acid molecule e.g., within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex e.g., as described herein.
  • a transposase used in such a process may be, for example, a Tn5 transposase.
  • a transposase-nucleic acid complex may have a structure such as that of FIG. 9, 10, or 11. Subsequent to generation of a tagmented fragment (e.g., as described herein), the transposase of the transposase-nucleic acid complex may leave or be removed (e.g., displaced, for example, by an enzyme). Alternatively, the transposase may remain in place.
  • the tagmented fragment may comprise sequences corresponding to the original nucleic acid molecule of the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus; transposon end sequences and sequences complementary thereto; and one or more sequencing primers or portions thereof.
  • a splint sequence comprising a sequence complementary to a sequencing primer or portion thereof the tagmented fragment may hybridize to the sequencing primer or portion thereof.
  • the splint sequence may be ligated to a transposon end sequence or complement thereof of the tagmented fragment (e.g., using a ligase).
  • the tagmented fragment Prior to or after hybridization and/or ligation of the splint sequence, the tagmented fragment may be partitioned into a partition of a plurality of partitions (e.g., droplets of wells).
  • the tagmented fragment may be co-partitioned with one or more reagents.
  • the tagmented fragment may be included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus, which cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be lysed or permeabilized to provide access to the tagmented fragment therein (e.g., as described herein).
  • a sequence of the splint sequence may then hybridize to a nucleic acid barcode molecule (e.g., a nucleic acid barcode molecule coupled to a bead, as described herein).
  • the bead may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules, where a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise, for example, a flow cell adapter sequence, a barcode sequence, and a UMI sequence.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule may also comprise an overhang sequence having sequence complementarity to a sequence of the splint sequence. The overhang sequence may hybridize to the sequence of the splint sequence. A transposase reserved in the tagmented fragment may block gap filling during these processes.
  • the splint sequence may then be extended within the partition (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase).
  • the contents of the partition of the plurality of partitions may be released from the partition (e.g., as described herein).
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule Prior or subsequent to release of the contents of the partition, the nucleic acid barcode molecule may be ligated to the sequencing primer of the processed tagmented fragment. Outside of the partition, the nucleic acid barcode molecule may hybridize to the sequencing primer or portion thereof of the template nucleic acid fragment.
  • the transposase may leave the processed tagmented fragment (e.g., via a strand displacing polymerase) and the remaining gaps may be filled to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule. Alternatively, gaps may be filled as described elsewhere herein.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid molecule may then be subjected to a nucleic acid amplification process (e.g., PCR, as described herein). Amplification may comprise incorporation of one or more additional sequences, such as one or more flow cell adapter sequences (e.g., P7 sequences).
  • FIG. 22 shows an example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 2200 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 2250 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • Multiple beads e.g., gel beads
  • a single bead comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules configured for analysis of both DNA and RNA molecules (e.g., as described herein) may be included within a given partition.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 2204 comprising insert sequence 2208 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 2206 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 2202 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 2210 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 2207.
  • a template nucleic acid fragment e.g., tagmented fragment
  • insert sequence 2208 e.g., region of open chromatin
  • transposon end sequences 2206 and complements thereof e.g., a complement thereof
  • sequencing primer or portion thereof 2202 e.g., an R1 sequence
  • sequencing primer or portion thereof 2210 e.g., an R2 sequence
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 2204 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 2204 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 2204 may be contacted with splint sequence 2212, which splint sequence may comprise a first sequence 2202’ that is complementary to sequencing primer or portion thereof 2202 and a second sequence 2224.
  • Sequence 2224 may comprise a blocking group (e.g., a 3’ blocking group), which blocking group may prevent extension by reverse transcription.
  • Sequence 2202’ may hybridize 2214 to sequence 2202 of template nucleic acid fragment 2204 to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising splint sequence 2212 and template nucleic acid fragment 2204. Sequence 2202’ may be ligated 2226 to the complement of transposon end sequence 2206 of template nucleic acid fragment 2204 (e.g., using a ligase). Template nucleic acid fragment 2204 attached to splint sequence 2212 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., droplet or well) within a plurality of partitions (e.g., as described herein).
  • a partition e.g., droplet or well
  • the partition may also include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 2216 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 2218a and 2218b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 2220a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 2222a, and an overhang sequence 2224’ that is complementary to sequence 2224 of the splint sequence 2212. Sequence 2224 may hybridize 2228 to sequence 2224’.
  • Splint sequence 2212 may then be extended 2230 (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase or DNA polymerase) to provide sequences 2220a’ and 2222a’ that are complementary to sequences 2220a and 2222a of nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a.
  • sequence 2224 may hybridize to sequence 2224’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule and nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) to sequence 2202 of template nucleic acid fragment 2204.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a attached to splint sequence 2212 and template nucleic acid fragment 2204 in bulk solution.
  • Sequence 2224’ of nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) 2232 to sequence 2202 of template nucleic acid fragment 2204.
  • gaps 2207 may be filled 2234 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may also undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) to provide a double-stranded amplification product 2236 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 2238 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule 2258 comprising RNA sequence 2260 and polyA sequence 2262 may be contacted 2264 with primer molecule 2252 comprising polyT sequence 2254 and additional primer sequence 2256. RNA molecule 2258 may then be reverse transcribed 2276 off of polyT sequence 2254 using a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 2270 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 2268. Sequence 2270 may be a polyC sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 2220b (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 2222b, UMI sequence 2272, and a sequence 2274 complementary to sequence 2270 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 2220b (e.g., an R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 2222b, UMI sequence 2272, and a sequence 2274 complementary to sequence 2270 (e.g., a polyG sequence).
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218b may be used to perform template switching 2278, which process may also result in the generation of a barcoded cDNA molecule.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the barcoded cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 2280 to provide a double-stranded amplification product 2284 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 2218b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 2286, and an additional sequence 2288 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 2290, a sample index sequence 2292, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence) 2294.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/or nucleic acid amplification.
  • FIG. 23 shows another example schematic corresponding to the preceding example.
  • Panel 2300 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of chromatin from a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus
  • panel 2350 shows a workflow corresponding to processing of an mRNA molecule from the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus.
  • Multiple beads e.g., gel beads
  • a single bead comprising nuclei c acid barcode molecules configured for analysis of both DNA and RNA molecules (e.g., as described herein) may be included within a given partition.
  • chromatin included within a cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus is processed (e.g., as described herein) to provide a template nucleic acid fragment (e.g., tagmented fragment) 2304 comprising insert sequence 2308 (e.g., region of open chromatin) and a complement thereof, transposon end sequences 2306 and complements thereof, sequencing primer or portion thereof 2302 (e.g., an R1 sequence), sequencing primer or portion thereof 2310 (e.g., an R2 sequence), and gaps 2307.
  • a template nucleic acid fragment e.g., tagmented fragment
  • insert sequence 2308 e.g., region of open chromatin
  • transposon end sequences 2306 and complements thereof e.g., a complement thereof
  • sequencing primer or portion thereof 2302 e.g., an R1 sequence
  • sequencing primer or portion thereof 2310 e.g., an R2 sequence
  • the cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus comprising template nucleic acid fragment 2304 may be lysed, permeabilized, or otherwise processed to provide access to template nucleic acid fragment 2304 (and one or more RNA molecules) therein.
  • Template nucleic acid fragment 2304 may be contacted with splint sequence 2312, which splint sequence may comprise a first sequence 2302’ that is complementary to sequencing primer or portion thereof 2302 and a second sequence 2324.
  • Sequence 2324 may comprise a blocking group (e.g., a 3’ blocking group), which blocking group may prevent extension by reverse transcription.
  • Sequence 2302’ may hybridize 2314 to sequence 2302 of template nucleic acid fragment 2304 to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising splint sequence 2312 and template nucleic acid fragment 2304. Sequence 2302’ may be ligated 2326 to the complement of transposon end sequence 2306 of template nucleic acid fragment 2304 (e.g., using a ligase). Template nucleic acid fragment 2304 attached to splint sequence 2312 may then be partitioned within a partition (e.g., droplet or well) within a plurality of partitions (e.g., as described herein).
  • a partition e.g., droplet or well
  • the partition may also include a bead (e.g., gel bead) 2316 coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules 2318a and 2318b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 2320a (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 2322a, and an overhang sequence 2324’ that is complementary to sequence 2324 of the splint sequence 2312. Sequence 2324 may hybridize 2328 to sequence 2324’.
  • Splint sequence 2312 may then be extended 2330 (e.g., using a reverse transcriptase or DNA polymerase) to provide sequences 2320a’ and 2322a’ that are complementary to sequences 2320a and 2322a of nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a.
  • sequence 2324 may hybridize to sequence 2324’ to provide a partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule and nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) to sequence 2302 of template nucleic acid fragment 2304.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the partially double-stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a attached to splint sequence 2312 and template nucleic acid fragment 2304 in bulk solution.
  • Sequence 2324’ of nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a may be ligated (e.g., using a ligase) 2332 to sequence 2302 of template nucleic acid fragment 2304.
  • gaps 2307 may be filled 2334 via a gap filling extension process (e.g., using a DNA polymerase) to provide a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
  • This molecule may also undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) to provide a double- stranded amplification product 2336 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318a, the original chromatin molecule, and, optionally, an additional sequence 2338 that may be a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P7 sequence). Gaps may be filled in the partition prior to bulk processing.
  • amplification e.g., PCR
  • RNA molecule deriving from the same cell, cell bead, or cell nucleus may be processed.
  • RNA molecule 2358 comprising RNA sequence 2360 and polyA sequence 2362 and gel bead 2316 may be provided within a partition.
  • Bead (e.g., gel bead) 2316 (e.g., the same bead described in panel 2300) may be included within the partition and may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318b.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318b may comprise a flow cell adapter sequence 2368 (e.g., a P5 sequence), a barcode sequence 2322b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 2322a), UMI sequence 2366, and a polyT sequence 2364 complementary to polyA sequence 2362.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318b may comprise a sequencing primer sequence 2368 (e.g., a R1 sequence or partial R1 sequence), a barcode sequence 2322b (e.g., the same barcode sequence as barcode sequence 2322a), UMI sequence 2366, and a polyT sequence 2364 complementary to polyA sequence 2362.
  • PolyT sequence 2364 may hybridize to polyA sequence 2362 of RNA molecule 2358.
  • RNA molecule 2358 may be reverse transcribed 2370 off of polyT sequence 2364 to provide an cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 2372.
  • the reverse transcription process may use a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity, which reverse transcriptase may append sequence 2374 to the resultant cDNA molecule comprising cDNA sequence 2372.
  • Sequence 2374 may be a polyC sequence.
  • a template switch oligonucleotide 2378 comprising a primer sequence 2380 and a sequence complementary to sequence 2374 (e.g., a polyG sequence) may hybridize to the cDNA molecule.
  • the contents of the partition may then be recovered in bulk solution (e.g., a droplet may be broken) to provide the cDNA molecule in bulk solution.
  • the cDNA molecule may undergo amplification (e.g., PCR) 2384. Additional amplification (e.g., PCR) 2386 may to performed to provide a double-stranded amplification product 2388 that includes sequences of the nucleic acid barcode molecule 2318b, the original RNA molecule or cDNA corresponding thereto, a flow cell adapter sequence 2398 (e.g., a P7 sequence), and an additional sequence 2390 that may comprise a sequencing primer or portion thereof (e.g., an R2 sequence) 2396, a sample index sequence 2394, and a flow cell adapter sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence) 2392.
  • the barcoded cDNA molecule may also or alternatively undergo fragmentation, end repair, dA tailing, ligation of one or more adapter sequences, and/
  • the present disclosure provides a method for characterizing cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for characterizing a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei as belonging to different classes of cells (e.g., cell types) and/or originating from different sources, such as from different tissues or organs.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for identifying tumor-associated cells and/or cell nuclei among a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • a method for characterizing a cell or cell nucleus may comprise providing a partition (e.g., droplet) comprising the cell or cell nucleus and a particle (e.g., gel bead).
  • the cell or cell nucleus may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid molecules, which plurality of nucleic acid molecules may comprise a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules and a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules.
  • the plurality of DNA molecules may comprise chromatin (e.g., as described herein).
  • the particle may comprise a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled thereto (e.g., as described herein).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be releasably coupled to the particle and may be releasable from the particle upon application of a stimulus, such as a chemical stimulus (e.g., a reducing agent such as DTT).
  • a stimulus such as a chemical stimulus (e.g., a reducing agent such as DTT).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may be coupled to the particle via a labile moiety (e.g., as described herein).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the particle may all be identical.
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise one or more different nucleic acid sequences.
  • each nucleic acid barcode molecule of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a unique molecular identifier sequence.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise an identical nucleic acid barcode sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the particle and nucleic acid molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid molecules of the cell or cell nucleus may be used to generate a plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules (e.g., as described herein). Examples of workflows for generating barcoded nucleic acid molecules are described elsewhere herein and shown in, for example, FIGs. 12-23.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules may comprise (i) a first subset comprising sequences corresponding to an RNA molecule of the plurality of RNA molecules and (ii) a second subset comprising sequences corresponding to a DNA molecule of the plurality of DNA molecules.
  • Each barcoded nucleic acid molecule of the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules may comprise a common nucleic acid barcode sequence.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid barcode molecules, or derivatives thereof, may be processed to generate sequencing information corresponding to the DNA molecule and the RNA molecule.
  • the sequencing information may be used to characterize the cell or cell nucleus. For example, the sequencing information may be used to identify a type of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the cell or cell nucleus may be identified as having a type selected from the group consisting of, for example, monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, plasmacytoid dendritic cells, dendritic cells, and stromal cells. Specific subclasses of such cell types may also be identified.
  • the cell or cell nucleus may be identified as being a CD14 monocyte, CD16 monocyte, a myeloid dendritic cell, a plasmacytoid dendritic cell, replicating B cell, normal B cell, tumor B cell, naive B cell, memory B cell, plasmablastB cells, lymphoplasmacytoid cells, B-l cells, regulatory B cells, plasma B cells, IgM+ memory B cell, IgD+ memory B cell, regulatory B cells, plasma B cell, replicating T cell, normal T cell, helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, memory T cells, regulatory T cells, natural killer T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cell, CD8+ MAIT cell, CD8 gamma delta T cells, effector T cell, CD4 memory T cell, naive T cell, or another cell type.
  • CD14 monocyte CD16 monocyte
  • a myeloid dendritic cell a plasmacytoid dendritic cell
  • replicating B cell normal B cell, tumor
  • a method for characterizing cells and/or cell nuclei may involve generating sequencing information corresponding to ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules (e.g., as described herein) and sequencing information corresponding to deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules (e.g., as described herein).
  • RNA sequencing information may include information relating to gene expression and is thus alternately referred to herein as “gene expression data.”
  • RNA sequencing information may include information derived from messenger RNA (mRNA), which information may provide insight into proteins that may be translated from the mRNA.
  • DNA sequencing information may include information relating to regions of accessible chromatin (e.g., tagmented fragments) and is thus alternately referred to herein as “chromatin data” or “ATAC data.”
  • DNA sequencing information may include information derived from regions of accessible or open chromatin (e.g., regions of chromatin between nucleosomes).
  • Generating RNA and DNA sequencing information may comprise preparation of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising nucleic acid barcode sequences corresponding to specific cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • a cell or cell nucleus may be provided in a partition and subjected to parallel workflows to process DNA molecules (e.g., chromatin) and RNA molecules included therein.
  • the resultant barcoded nucleic acid molecules may include a first set of barcoded nucleic acid molecules corresponding to DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a second set of barcoded nucleic acid molecules corresponding to RNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • Each barcoded nucleic acid molecule may include a nucleic acid barcode sequence, such as a nucleic acid barcode sequence provided to the partition as a component of a nucleic acid barcode molecule coupled to a particle (e.g., gel bead).
  • the nucleic acid barcode sequence of the barcoded nucleic acid molecules generated for a given cell or cell nucleus associated with a given partition may be identical across the barcoded nucleic acid molecules generated for the given cell or cell nucleus. Therefore, barcoded nucleic acid molecules corresponding to both DNA and RNA molecules of the given cell or cell nucleus may comprise the same nucleic acid barcode sequence.
  • barcoded nucleic acid molecules associated with each cell or cell nucleus may comprise different nucleic acid barcode sequences (e.g., as described herein).
  • Processing a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei in this manner may generate a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a first plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules derived from DNA molecules (e.g., chromatin or tagmented fragments) of the plurality of cells and cell nuclei and a second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules derived from RNA molecules of the plurality of cells and cell nuclei.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may be derived from a sample comprising a tumor or suspected of comprising a tumor.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may be derived from a sample obtained from a subject, such as a human subject.
  • the subject may be known to have or have had a tumor and/or a proliferative disease (e.g., cancer). Alternatively, the subject may be suspected of having a tumor and/or a proliferative disease (e.g., cancer).
  • the sample may be derived from a bodily fluid, such as blood and/or plasma.
  • the sample may be derived from a biopsy, such as a tumor biopsy.
  • a tumor may be a B cell lymphoma tumor.
  • FIG. 24 schematically illustrates how cells of a plurality of cells can be grouped into cell types (e.g., modalities) using parallel DNA (e.g., chromatin) and RNA processing (e.g., as described herein).
  • DNA e.g., chromatin
  • RNA processing e.g., as described herein.
  • nucleic acid barcode sequences of barcoded nucleic acid molecules analyzed via nucleic acid sequencing methods e.g., as described herein
  • FIG. 24 schematically illustrates how cells of a plurality of cells can be grouped into cell types (e.g., modalities) using parallel DNA (e.g., chromatin) and RNA processing (e.g., as described herein).
  • RNA e.g., gene expression
  • a plurality of transposed nuclei and a plurality of particles e.g., gel beads
  • Each particle of the plurality of particles may be coupled to nucleic acid barcode molecules of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising a common nucleic acid barcode sequence (e.g., as described herein).
  • the plurality of transposed nuclei and the plurality of particles may be processed using a microfluidic device to generate a plurality of droplets (e.g., aqueous droplets in oil). At least a subset of the plurality of droplets may comprise both a particle of the plurality of particles and a transposed nucleus of the plurality of transposed nuclei.
  • the plurality of droplets may also comprise one or more reagents for analyzing DNA and/or RNA molecules of the plurality of transposed nuclei (e.g., as described herein).
  • the plurality of droplets may be subjected to conditions sufficient to process the DNA and/or RNA molecules of transposed nuclei of the plurality of transposed nuclei to generate a plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules (e.g., using ligation, reverse transcription, etc., as described elsewhere herein), where each barcoded nucleic acid molecule of the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules includes a nucleic acid barcode sequence of a nucleic acid barcode molecule of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules coupled to the plurality of particles.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules may be recovered from the plurality of particles and may undergo additional processing, including nucleic acid amplification to generate copies of the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules and/or to append additional sequences such as sequencing primers and flow cell sequences to the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules may then be processed to generate sequencing libraries corresponding to accessible chromatin and gene expression for the transposed nuclei of the plurality of transposed nuclei. Note that this workflow may also be performed with cells or cell nuclei that have not yet been subjected to transposition (e.g., a transposition process may be performed within the partitions, as described elsewhere herein).
  • FIG. 39 schematically illustrates the data generated via parallel DNA (e.g., chromatin) and RNA processing (e.g., as described herein).
  • First data set 3900 corresponds to DNA molecules of a plurality of cells (here, four cells) and includes sequencing reads 3901, 3902, 3903, 3904, 3905, 3906, 3907, and 3908.
  • Each sequencing read includes a barcode sequence 3911, 3912, 3913, or 3914.
  • Barcode sequence 3911 is associated with a first cell (“Cell 1”).
  • Barcode sequence 3912 is associated with a second cell (“Cell 2”).
  • Barcode sequence 3913 is associated with a third cell (“Cell 3”).
  • Barcode sequence 3914 is associated with a third cell (“Cell 4”).
  • Each sequencing read also includes a sequence corresponding to a sequence of a DNA molecule (e.g., chromatin) of a cell of the plurality of cells.
  • sequencing read 3901 includes sequence 3915.
  • Sequencing reads 3902, 3903, 3904, 3905, 3906, 3907, and 3908 include sequences 3916, 3917, 3918, 3919, 3920, 3921, and 3922, respectively.
  • Second data set 3930 corresponds to RNA molecules of the plurality of cells and includes sequencing reads 3931, 3932, 3933, 3934, 3935, 3936, 3937, and 3938.
  • Each sequencing read includes a barcode sequence 3911, 3912, 3913, or 3914, indicating that the sequencing read is associated with a particular cell of the plurality of cells (e.g., Cell 1, Cell 2, Cell 3, or Cell 4).
  • Each sequencing read also includes a sequence corresponding to a sequence of an RNA molecule of a cell of the plurality of cells.
  • sequencing read 3931 includes sequence 3945.
  • Sequencing reads 3932, 3933, 3934, 3935, 3936, 3937, and 3938 include sequences 3946, 3947, 3948, 3949, 3950, 3951, and 3952, respectively.
  • First data set 3900 and second data set 3930 can be processed (e.g., using an algorithm to identify nucleic acid barcode sequences within sequencing reads and associate sequencing reads comprising common nucleic acid barcode sequences with one another) to generate third data set 3960.
  • Third data set 3960 includes both RNA and DNA sequencing information corresponding to cells of the plurality of cells.
  • barcode sequences can be used to identify RNA and DNA sequencing reads as corresponding to particular cells of the plurality of cells.
  • sequencing reads 3901, 3902, 3931, and 3932 can be identified as deriving from Cell 1 based on their shared nucleic acid barcode sequence 3911.
  • sequencing reads 3903, 3904, 3933, and 3934 can be identified as deriving from Cell 2 based on barcode sequence 3912; sequencing reads 3905, 3906, 3935, and 3936 can be identified as deriving from Cell 3 based on barcode sequence 3913; and sequencing reads 3907, 3908, 3937, and 3938 can be identified as deriving from Cell 4 based on barcode sequence 3914.
  • the complementary RNA (e.g., gene expression) and DNA (e.g., accessible chromatin) information associated with the cells of the plurality of cells may be used to characterize the cells.
  • gene expression and/or accessible chromatin data for Cell 1 may be used to identify Cell 1 as a tumor B cell
  • gene expression and/or accessible chromatin data for Cell 2 may be used to identify Cell 2 as a normal B cell.
  • Sequencing information obtained for DNA molecules may be used to characterize cells and/or cell nuclei of a plurality of cells from which it derives.
  • gene expression information alone may be sufficient to identify a cell type for a given cell or cell nucleus or collection thereof of a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • accessible chromatin information alone may be sufficient to identify a cell type for a given cell or cell nucleus or collection thereof of a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • gene expression and accessible chromatin information can be used to identify a cell type for a given cell or cell nucleus or collection thereof of a plurality of cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • the combination of gene expression and accessible chromatin information may be especially useful for identifying cell types across a plurality of cells, such as for a plurality of cells comprising at least about 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000, 5,000, 6,000, 7,000, 8,000, 9,000, 10,000 15,000, 20,000, 25,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, 60,000, 70,000, 80,000, 90,000, 100,000, or more cells.
  • FIG. 26 shows gene expression profiling of 24,000 peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), while FIG. 27 shows ATAC profiling of the same cells.
  • PBMCs peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • FIG. 27 shows ATAC profiling of the same cells.
  • Cells may be clustered by cell type, as shown in the left and right panels of the figures. As shown, cells may be characterized at a coarse or granular level and multiple different cell types may be identified among the plurality of cells. In this example, cells may be identified at a more granular analysis using gene expression than by using ATAC information. However, the inverse may be true (e.g., for different cell samples). As shown in FIGs.
  • cells may be identified as having a type selected from, for example, monocytes, natural killer cells, B cells, T cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, and stromal cells.
  • B cells may be identified as, for example, normal B cells, replicating B cells, tumor B cells, naive B cells, memory B cells, IgM+ memory B cells, IgD+ memory B cells, IgM+IgD+ memory B cells, and plasma B cells.
  • T cells may be identified as, for example, replicating T cells, normal T cells, mucosal associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, CD8+ MAIT cells, CD8 effector T cells, CD4 memory T cells, and naive T cells.
  • MAIT mucosal associated invariant T
  • Monocytes may be identified as, for example, CD14 monocytes and CD16 monocytes.
  • Dendritic cells may be identified as, for example, myeloid dendritic cells and plasmacytoid dendritic cells.
  • FIGs. 28 and 29A-B illustrate concordance between the gene expression and chromatin-based characterization of cells shown in FIGs. 26 and 27, respectively. The overlap shown in the central panel of FIG. 28 is a result of the clusters in the gene expression and chromatin cell type representations being oriented differently.
  • the cell type characterizations made using chromatin data may be subclassified into narrower cell classes upon correlation with gene expression data. For example, monocytes may be subdivided into CD14 monocyte and CD16 monocyte classes.
  • FIG. 30 compares different representations of cell clustering based on open chromatin analysis (upper left panel), gene expression analysis (upper right panel), and open chromatin analysis annotated using gene expression markers (lower panel).
  • Sequencing information corresponding to DNA molecules e.g., chromatin information
  • sequencing information corresponding to RNA molecules may be used in tandem to refine cell type classifications.
  • gene expression information may be used to subclassify (e.g., annotate) cell types identified using chromatin information.
  • chromatin information may be used to subclassify or disentangle cell types identified using gene expression information.
  • FIG. 32 An example of such a process is shown in FIG. 32.
  • the upper panels of FIG. 32 display cell classification based on chromatin information annotated with gene expression markers (upper left panel) and cell classification based on gene expression information alone (upper right panel).
  • naive/memory B cells may be identified as a single cluster.
  • naive B cells and memory B cells are identified as two distinct clusters (e.g., they have distinct chromatin signatures). These subclusters are highlighted in the lower left panel as subclusters 1 and 2. The lower right panel illustrates that these subclusters may be obscured when gene expression alone is used to classify cell types.
  • subclusters 1 and 2 Gene expression analysis of subclusters 1 and 2 identifies subcluster 1 as prospective memory B cells based on the relatively higher Ig and relatively lower naive B cell associated transcripts, while subcluster 2 may be identified as naive B cells. Therefore, complementary gene expression and chromatin analyses may be useful in differentiating between a wide variety of cell types among a population of cells or cell nuclei that may not be distinguishable using a single analysis alone.
  • the methods described herein may be applied to analysis of cell populations including diseased cells such as tumor cells.
  • the methods provided herein may comprise using sequencing information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in a sample.
  • the methods provided herein may be useful in diagnostic evaluations.
  • the methods provided herein may also or alternatively comprise using sequencing information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in a sample. Based at least in part on such analysis, a therapeutic regimen may be identified, e.g., for a subject from which a sample derives.
  • a therapeutic regimen may comprise administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in a tumor-specific gene expression pattern or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the methods provided herein may also be used to correlate genotypes and phenotypes at a single cell level. Such analyses may provide unique insights into various diseases and biological processes. For example, such analysis may provide insight into the development, diagnosis, and treatment of various cancers and other disorders in which somatic mutations may be key features.
  • Gene expression analysis coupled with chromatin analysis may also be used to identify tumor-specific signaling pathways: gene expression analysis may identify active receptors for a particular cell type (e.g., tumor cells), while chromatin analysis may provide insight into transcription factor activities.
  • a method of characterizing a plurality of cells or cell nuclei may comprise providing a first data set corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules (e.g., chromatin) of a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a second data set corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the first data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a first plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the regions of accessible chromatin and a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • the second data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the plurality of RNA molecules and the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • sequencing information e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads
  • a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may correspond to a nucleic acid barcode sequences of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • a particle comprising a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising a common nucleic acid barcode sequence of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences may be used to process the plurality of DNA molecules and RNA molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei (e.g., within a partition) (as described herein).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences of the first data set and the second data set may be used to identify first sequencing reads of the first plurality of sequencing reads and second sequencing reads of the second plurality of sequencing reads as corresponding to cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei, thereby generating a third data set comprising sequence information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin and RNA molecules associated with cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei. Cell types of the cells or cell nuclei may be identified using the sequence information of the third data set.
  • an example data analysis workflow can include one or more of the following analysis operations: a gene expression data processing operation, an ATAC data processing operation, a joint cell calling operation, a gene expression analysis operation, an ATAC analysis operation, and an ATAC and RNA analysis operation, or any combinations thereof. It is understood that, certain operations within the disclosure can be used either independently or in combination with other operations within the disclosure, while certain other operations within the disclosure can only be used in combination with certain other operations within the disclosure. Further, one or more of the operations or filters described below, presumably defaulted to be utilized as part of the computational pipeline for analyzing both the gene expression sequencing data and the single cell ATAC sequencing data, can also not be utilized per user input. It is understood that the reverse is also contemplated. It is further understood that additional operations for analyzing the sequencing data generated by the single cell sequencing workflow are also contemplated as part of the computational pipeline within the disclosure.
  • the gene expression data processing operation can comprise processing the barcodes in the single cell sequencing data set for fixing the occasional sequencing error in the barcodes so that the sequenced fragments can be associated with the original barcodes, thus improving the data quality.
  • the barcode processing operation can include checking each barcode sequence against a “whitelist” of correct barcode sequences.
  • the barcode processing operation can further include counting the frequency of each whitelist barcode.
  • the gene expression data processing can further comprise aligning the read sequences (also referred to as the “reads”) to a reference sequence.
  • a reference-based analysis is performed by aligning the read sequences (also referred to as the “reads”) to a reference sequence.
  • the reference sequence for the various embodiments herein can include a reference transcriptome sequence (including genes and introns) and its associated genome annotations, which include gene and transcript coordinates.
  • the reference transcriptome sequence and annotations of various embodiments herein can be obtained from reputable, well-established consortia, including but not limited to NCBI, GENCODE, Ensembl, and ENCODE.
  • the reference sequence can include single species and/or multi-species reference sequences.
  • systems and methods within the disclosure can also provide pre-built single and multi-species reference sequences.
  • the pre-built reference sequences can include information and files related to regulatory regions including, but not limited to, annotation of promoter, enhancer, CTCF binding sites, and DNase hypersensitivity sites.
  • systems and methods within the disclosure can also provide building custom reference sequences that are not pre-built.
  • Various embodiments herein can be configured to correct for sequencing errors in the UMI sequences, before UMI counting. Reads that were confidently mapped to the transcriptome can be placed into groups that share the same barcode, UMI, and gene annotation. If two groups of reads have the same barcode and gene, but their UMIs differ by a single base (i.e., are Hamming distance 1 apart), then one of the UMIs was likely introduced by a substitution error in sequencing. In this case, the UMI of the less-supported read group is corrected to the UMI with higher support.
  • each observed barcode, UMI, gene combination is recorded as a UMI count in an unfiltered feature-barcode matrix, which contains every barcode from fixed list of known-good barcode sequences. This includes background and cell associated barcodes. The number of reads supporting each counted UMI is also recorded in the molecule info file.
  • the gene expression data processing can further comprise annotating the individual cDNA fragment reads as exonic, intronic, intergenic, and by whether they align to the reference genome with high confidence.
  • a fragment read is annotated as exonic if at least a portion of the fragment intersects an exon.
  • a fragment read is annotated as intronic if it is non-exonic and intersects an intron.
  • the annotation process can be determined by the alignment method and its parameters/settings as performed, for example, using the STAR aligner.
  • the gene expression data processing can further comprise unique molecule processing to better identify certain subpopulations such as for example, low RNA content cells, a unique molecule processing operation can be performed prior to cell calling. For low RNA content cells, such a operation is important, particularly when low RNA content cells are mixed into a population of high RNA content cells.
  • the unique molecule processing can include a high content (e.g., RNA content) capture operation and a low content capture operation.
  • the ATAC data processing operation can comprise processing the barcodes in the single cell ATAC sequencing data for fixing the occasional sequencing error in the barcodes so that the sequenced fragments can be associated with the original barcodes, thus improving the data quality.
  • the barcode processing operation can include checking each barcode sequence against a “whitelist” of correct barcode sequences.
  • the barcode processing operation can further include counting the frequency of each whitelist barcode.
  • the ATAC data processing operation can further comprise aligning the read sequences (also referred to as the “reads”) to a reference sequence.
  • One of more sub-operations can be utilized for trimming off adapter sequences, primer oligo sequences, or both in the read sequence before the read sequence is aligned to the reference genome.
  • the ATAC data processing operation can further comprise marking sequencing and PCR duplicates and outputting high quality de-duplicated fragments.
  • One or more sub operations can be employed for identifying duplicate reads, such as sorting aligned reads by 5' position to account for transposition event and identifying groups of read-pairs and original read- pair.
  • the process may further include filters that, when activated in various embodiments herein, can determine whether a fragment is mapped with MAPQ > 30 on both reads (i.e., includes a barcode overlap for reads with mapping quality below 30), not mitochondrial, and not chimerically mapped.
  • the ATAC data processing operation can comprise a peak calling analysis that includes counting cut sites in a window around each base-pair of the genome and thresholding it to find regions enriched for open chromatin. Peaks are regions in the genome enriched for accessibility to transposase enzymes. Only open chromatin regions that are not bound by nucleosomes and regulatory DNA-binding proteins (e.g., transcription factors) are accessible by transposase enzymes for ATAC sequencing. Therefore, the ends of each sequenced fragment of the various embodiments herein can be considered to be indicative of a region of open chromatin.
  • the combined signal from these fragments can be analyzed in accordance with various embodiments herein to determine regions of the genome enriched for open chromatin, and thereby, to understand the regulatory and functional significance of such regions. Therefore, using the sites as determined by the ends of the fragments in the position- sorted fragment file (e.g., the fragments. tsv.gz file) described above, the number of transposition events at each base-pair along the genome can be counted. In one embodiment within the disclosure, the cut sites in a window around each base-pair of the genome is counted.
  • the joint cell calling analysis operation can comprise a cell calling analysis that includes associating a subset of barcodes observed in both the single cell gene expression library and the single cell ATAC library to the cells loaded from the sample. Identification of these cell barcodes can allow one to then analyze the variation and quantification in data at a single cell resolution.
  • the process may further include correction of gel bead artifacts, such as gel bead multiples (where a cell shares more than one barcoded gel bead) and barcode multiplets (which occurs when a cell associated gel bead has more than one barcode).
  • gel bead artifacts such as gel bead multiples (where a cell shares more than one barcoded gel bead) and barcode multiplets (which occurs when a cell associated gel bead has more than one barcode).
  • the operations associated with cell calling and correction of gel bead artifacts are utilized together for performing the necessary analysis as part of the various embodiments herein.
  • the record of mapped high-quality fragments that passed all the filters of the various embodiments disclosed in the operations above and were indicated as a fragment in the fragment file are recorded.
  • the peaks determined in the peak calling operation disclosed herein the number of fragments that overlap any peak regions, for each barcode, can be utilized to separate the signal from noise, i.e., to separate barcodes associated with cells from non-cell barcodes. It is to be understood that such method of separation of signal from noise works better in practice as compared to naively using the number of fragments per barcode.
  • the joint cell calling can be performed in at least two operations.
  • the barcodes that have fraction of fragments overlapping called peaks lower than the fraction of genome in peaks are identified.
  • the peaks are padded by 2000 bp on both sides so as to account for the fragment length for this calculation.
  • the gene expression analysis operation can comprise generating a feature-barcode matrix that summarizes that gene expression counts per each cell.
  • the feature-barcode matrix can include only detected cellular barcodes.
  • the generation of the feature-barcode matrix can involve compiling the valid non-filtered UMI counts per gene (e.g., output from the ‘Unique Molecule Processing’ operation discussed herein) from each cell-associated barcode (e.g., output from the ‘Cell Calling operation discussed above) together into the final output count matrix, which can then be used for downstream analysis operations.
  • the gene expression analysis operation can comprise various dimensionality reduction, clustering, t-SNE and UMAP projection tools.
  • Dimensionality reduction tools of the various embodiments herein are utilized to reduce the number of random variables under consideration by obtaining a set of principal variables.
  • clustering tools can be utilized to assign objects of the various embodiments herein to homogeneous groups (called clusters) while ensuring that objects in different groups are not similar.
  • t-SNE and UMAP projection tools of the various embodiments herein can include an algorithm for visualization of the data of the various embodiments herein.
  • systems and methods within the disclosure can further include dimensionality reduction, clustering and t-SNE and UMAP projection tools.
  • the analysis associated with dimensionality reduction, clustering, and t-SNE and UMAP projection for visualization are utilized together for performing the necessary analysis as part of the various embodiments herein.
  • Various analysis tools for dimensionality reduction include Principal Component Analysis (PCA), Latent Semantic Analysis (LSA), and Probabilistic Latent Semantic Analysis (PLSA), clustering, and t-SNE and UMAP projection for visualization that allow one to group and compare a population of cells with another.
  • the systems and methods within the disclosure are directed to identifying differential gene expression.
  • dimensionality reduction in accordance with various embodiments herein can be performed to cast the data into a lower dimensional space.
  • the gene expression analysis operation can comprise a differential expression analysis that performs differential analysis to identify genes whose expression is specific to each cluster, Cell Ranger tests, for each gene and each cluster, whether the in-cluster mean differs from the out-of-cluster mean.
  • the ATAC analysis can comprise determining the peak-barcode matrix.
  • a raw peak-barcode matrix can be generated first, which is a count matrix consisting of the counts of fragment ends (or cut sites) within each peak region for each barcode. This raw peak-barcode matrix captures the enrichment of open chromatin per barcode. The raw matrix can then be filtered to consist only of cell barcodes by filtering out the non-cell barcodes from the raw peak-barcode matrix, which can then be used in the various dimensionality reduction, clustering and visualization operations of the various embodiments herein.
  • the ATAC analysis operation can comprise various dimensionality reduction, clustering and t-SNE projection tools, similar to as described above in the gene expression analysis operation.
  • the ATAC analysis operation can comprise annotating the peaks by performing gene annotations and discovering transcription factor-motif matches on each peak. It is contemplated that peak annotation can be employed with subsequent differential analysis operations within various embodiments of the disclosure. Various peak annotation procedures and parameters are contemplated and are discussed in detail below.
  • Peaks are regions enriched for open chromatin, and thus have potential for regulatory function. It is therefore understood that observing the location of peaks with respect to genes can be insightful.
  • TSS closest transcription start sites
  • a peak is associated with a gene if the peak is within 600 bases upstream or 100 bases downstream of the TSS.
  • genes can be associated to putative distal peaks that are much further from the TSS and are less than lOOkb upstream or downstream from the ends of the transcript.
  • This association can be adopted by companion visualization software of the various embodiments herein, e.g., Loupe Cell Browser.
  • this association can be used to construct and visualize derived features such as promoter-sums that can pool together counts from peaks associated with a gene.
  • the ATAC analysis operation can further comprise a transcription factor (TF) motif enrichment analysis.
  • TF motif enrichment analysis includes generating a TF-barcode matrix consisting of the peak-barcode matrix (i.e., pooled cut-site counts for peaks) having a TF motif match, for each motif and each barcode. It is contemplated that the TF motif enrichment can then be utilized for subsequent analysis operations, such as differential accessibility analysis, within various embodiments of the disclosure. Detail related to TF motif enrichment analysis is provided below.
  • the ATAC analysis operation can further comprise a differential accessibility analysis that performs differential analysis of TF binding motifs and peaks for identifying differential gene expression between different cells or groups of cells.
  • a differential accessibility analysis that performs differential analysis of TF binding motifs and peaks for identifying differential gene expression between different cells or groups of cells.
  • Various algorithms and statistical models within the disclosure such as a Negative Binomial (NB2) generalized linear model (GLM), can be employed for the differential accessibility analysis.
  • NB2 Negative Binomial
  • LLM generalized linear model
  • the ATAC and RNA analysis operation can comprise a feature linkage analysis for detecting correlations between pairs of genomic features detected in each of a plurality of cells, for example, between open chromatin regions and genes from single cell datasets. Such correlations can be denoted as feature linkages or linkage correlations and can be used for inferring enhancer-gene targeting relationships and constructing transcriptional networks. More details for feature linkage analysis is provided in FIG. 43.
  • joint data from the joint cell calling operation can be further processed by the ATAC and RNA analysis operation to identify correlations and a significance of the correlations between the single cell gene expression library and the single cell ATAC library.
  • the features with strong linkage correlations can be considered to be “co-expressed” and enrich for a shared regulatory mechanism.
  • the accessibility of an enhancer and the expression of its target gene can display a very synchronized differential pattern across a heterogeneous population of cells.
  • a highly accessible enhancer leads to an elevated level of transcription factor (TF) binding, which in turn leads to elevated (or repressed) gene expression.
  • TF transcription factor
  • no TF can bind to the enhancer, and thus transcription activation is at minimum, which leads to reduced target gene expression.
  • the analysis associated with gene expression or chromatin accessibility can also comprise random forest tree, random tree, naive bayes classifier, k-means clustering, hierarchical clustering, predictions tree, classification Tree, c4.5 classifier, regression trees, neural network, affinity propagation, agglomerative clustering, birch DBSCAN clustering, mini-batch k-means, mean shift, spectral clustering, mixture of Gaussians, or xGBoost.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for identifying a genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element corresponding to an expressed protein.
  • the method may comprise providing DNA (e.g., chromatin) sequencing information and RNA (e.g., gene expression) sequencing information (e.g., as described herein) and associating such information with cells and/or cell nuclei from which they derive (e.g., as described herein).
  • the cells and/or cell nuclei may be characterized as corresponding to specific cell types (e.g., as described herein). Chromatin data and gene expression data may be used in tandem to identify cell types for the cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • Gene expression sequencing information may be used to identify an expressed protein of interest, such as a protein that is differentially expressed between different cell types.
  • gene expression data may be used to identify a protein such as a receptor that is over-expressed in a first cell type relative to a second cell type, where the first cell type may be associated with a disease state (e.g., a tumor cell) and the second cell type may be associated with a healthy state (e.g., a normal cell).
  • gene expression data may be used to identify a protein such as a receptor that is under-expressed in a first cell type relative to a second cell type, where the first cell type may be associated with a disease state (e.g., a tumor cell) and the second cell type may be associated with a healthy state (e.g., a normal cell).
  • the differentially expressed protein may be, for example, a cytokine, such as an interleukin (e.g., IL-2, IL-4, IL-10, IL-13, etc.) receptor.
  • Chromatin information may be used to identify a genetic feature that may be relevant to the differentially expressed protein.
  • the genetic feature may be, for example, a cis-regulatory element or trans-regulatory element.
  • a method of identifying a genetic feature (e.g., regulatory region) corresponding to an expressed protein may comprise providing a first data set corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules (e.g., chromatin) of a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a second data set corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the first data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a first plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the regions of accessible chromatin and a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • the second data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the plurality of RNA molecules and the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • sequencing information e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads
  • a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may correspond to a nucleic acid barcode sequences of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • a particle comprising a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising a common nucleic acid barcode sequence of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences may be used to process the plurality of DNA molecules and RNA molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei (e.g., within a partition) (as described herein).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences of the first data set and the second data set may be used to identify first sequencing reads of the first plurality of sequencing reads and second sequencing reads of the second plurality of sequencing reads as corresponding to cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei, thereby generating a third data set comprising sequence information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin and RNA molecules associated with individual cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • Cell types of the cells or cell nuclei may be identified using the sequence information of the third data set.
  • the sequence information corresponding to the RNA molecules may be used to identify an expressed protein of a cell type of the identified cell types.
  • the sequence information corresponding to the regions of accessible chromatin may be used to identify a genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element corresponding to the expressed protein.
  • the sequence information comprised by the first data set is generated from a plurality of tagged DNA fragments generated and processed as described herein.
  • a plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules are generated, including a first subset comprising sequences corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of said plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of said sample and a second subset comprising sequences corresponding to said ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of the same cell or cell nucleus.
  • the plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules from the same cell or cell nucleus is generated within the same partition.
  • the barcoded nucleic acid molecules generated in the same partition may share the same barcode sequence.
  • the method includes sequencing the barcoded nucleic acid molecules.
  • the provided methods include: generating a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of a cell or cell nuclei (e.g., including ATAC data processing and/or analysis), generating a second data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules of said cell or cell nuclei (e.g., including gene expression data processing and/or analysis), and generating a linked signature of said cell or cell nuclei using said first and second data sets (e.g., including ATAC and RNA feature linkage analysis).
  • DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
  • RNA ribonucleic acid
  • the linked signature is generated using a feature linkage analysis process and workflow or information therefrom.
  • generating the linked feature comprises linking at least one pair of genomic features.
  • the linked feature comprises linking at least two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, of ten genomic features.
  • a genomic feature can comprise regions of accessible chromatin or gene expression levels.
  • a genomic feature can comprise transcriptional factor accessibility, nucleosome occupancy, sequence identity, secondary structure of a region, tertiary structure of a region, location in the genome or physical location in the nucleus (e.g., perinuclear DNA positioning or nuclear pore complex-associated positioning).
  • a location in the genome can be calculated based on physical distance or recombination frequency between two genetic loci.
  • at least two genomic features can be linked by a genetic locus.
  • a genetic locus can comprise a functional unit of a gene.
  • a functional unit of a gene can comprise sequences required to express or synthesize at least a nucleic acid or polypeptide product.
  • the chromatin accessibility of a promoter sequence and the level of expressed RNA driven or regulated by the promoter sequence can be linked.
  • a nucleic acid product can an RNA.
  • An RNA can comprise coding or non-coding RNA.
  • RNA can comprise an mRNA, tRNA, rRNA, snRNA, snoRNA, long non-coding RNA, miRNA, small rDNA-derived RNA (srRNA), tRNA-derived small RNA (tsRNA), antisense RNA, siRNA, or eRNA.
  • An RNA can also comprise any precursor of the RNA herein and thereof.
  • a linked signature for a cell or cell nucleus may link two or more distinct data sets corresponding to genomic features or other information about the cell or cell nucleus.
  • a linked signature may comprise a combined or correlated data set of genomic features or other information.
  • a linked signature for a cell or cell nucleus may link a first data set comprising sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules of the cell or cell nucleus and a second data set comprising sequence information corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules, or gene expression data thereof.
  • a linked signature can comprise manual classification of a plurality distinct data sets corresponding to genomic features or other information about the cell or cell nucleus.
  • a linked signature can also comprise computational classification of a plurality of distinct data sets corresponding to genomic features or other information about the cell or cell nucleus.
  • a linked signature can comprise addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, or exponentiation of a plurality of distinct data sets corresponding to genomic features or other information about the cell or cell nucleus.
  • feature linkages comprise correlated signals across cells or cell nuclei for peaks identified in the ATAC library and transcript levels identified in the gene expression library.
  • feature linkages can be positively or negatively correlated (FIG. 51).
  • an open enhancer region may have a positive correlation with gene expression of its associated transcript, while the binding of a repressor would result in a negatively correlated feature linkage.
  • the significance of a feature linkage can be determined. In some cases, the greater the correlation between open chromatin signal and gene expression, the higher the significance of the feature linkage.
  • a signal of a cell nuclei for peaks identified in the ATAC library, in transcript levels identified in the gene expression library, and/or correlated feature linkage (e.g., linked signature) of the two can be compared between a test sample and a control sample (or between a test and control cell or cell nuclei thereof).
  • the linked signature for a cell or cell nucleus may correlate distinct pieces of information about the cell or cell nucleus to determine a characteristic or a condition of a sample or subject from which the cell or cell nucleus is described.
  • the linked signature for a cell or cell nucleus may be unique to the cell or cell nucleus.
  • the linked signature for a cell or cell nucleus may be unique to a group of cells or cell nuclei sharing a similar signature.
  • respective linked signatures of two or more cells may be compared or otherwise processed against each other to determine similarities or differences between the two or more cells.
  • a linked signature for a reference or control cell known to have a condition may be compared or processed against a linked signature for an analyte cell, and if one or more aspects of the two linked signatures are similar, which one or more aspects are indicative of the known condition, it may be determined that the analyte cell, or the sample or subject form which the analyte cell is derived from, has or suffers from the same known condition. Similarly, if one or more aspects of the two linked signatures diverge, which one or more aspects are indicative of the known condition, it may be determined that the analyte cell, or the sample or subject form which the analyte cell is derived from, does not have or does not suffer from the same known condition as the reference or control cell.
  • similarity or divergence of a plurality of linked signatures can be determined by manual classification or computational classification of the plurality of linked signatures. Similarity or divergence of a plurality of linked signatures can also be determined by qualitative or quantitative classification of the plurality of linked signatures. A qualitative classification can be based on the presence or absence of a genomic feature or a plurality of genomic features. A quantitative classification of the plurality of linked signatures can comprise correlating at least two linked signatures or computing the similarity of a plurality of linked signatures. The correlating can comprise carrying out a correlation test between a plurality of linked signatures.
  • a correlation test can comprise, for example, a Pearson, Spearman’s rank, Kendall’s rank, biweight midcorrelation, distance correlation, percentage bend, Shepherd’s Pi, Blomqvist, Hoeffding’s D, gamma, Gaussian rank, point-biserial and biserial, polychoric, tetrachoric, partial, or multilevel correlation test, or other type of correlation test.
  • a linked signature or a plurality of linked signatures may be analyzed using one or more machine learning algorithms.
  • a machine learning algorithm can comprise a statistical classification model or a clustering model.
  • a classification model can comprise a k-nearest neighbor classifier, Naive Bayes classifier, support vector machine, or neural network.
  • a clustering model can comprise hierarchical clustering, categorical clustering, or k-means clustering.
  • the similarity of a plurality of linked signatures can be computed based on a similarity score.
  • a similarity score can comprise a distance measurement.
  • a distance measurement can comprise the Euclidean distance or Manhattan distance.
  • the methods provided herein to generate and process the linked signature of the cell or cell nuclei can determine a condition.
  • a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is similar to a control linked signature with the condition.
  • a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is divergent from a control linked signature without the condition.
  • a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is classified as the same class of a control linked signature with the condition.
  • a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is not classified as the same class of a control linked signature without the condition.
  • a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is identified as the same cluster of a control linked signature with the condition. In some embodiments, a linked signature can indicate a condition if the signature is not identified as the same cluster of a control linked signature without the condition.
  • a control linked signature can comprise a linked signature from a control cell or nucleus of a control cell sample.
  • the control linked signature profile can be obtained from a population of samples or subjects.
  • a control cell or nucleus of a control cell sample can comprise a cell or cell nucleus with at least one known alteration, condition, variation, characteristic or property.
  • a cell or cell nucleus can be derived from a bodily fluid.
  • a bodily fluid can comprise blood, saliva, excreta, body tissue, mucus, semen, urine, amniotic fluid, aqueous humour, bile, breast milk, cerebrospinal fluid, cerumen, chyle, exudates, gastric juice, lymph, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, pleural fluid, pus, sebum, serous fluid, sputum, synovial fluid, tears, vomit, or tissue fluid.
  • a cell or cell nucleus can be derived from a biopsy.
  • a biopsy can comprise a sample of tissue or cells for determining the presence or extent of a condition.
  • a biopsy can comprise cells or tissues from lymph nodes. Lymph nodes can comprise lymph node clusters from the head, neck, thorax, abdomen, arm, or lower limbs.
  • a condition can comprise a disease state or a risk to a disease state.
  • a disease state can mean a subject suffering from a disease or a symptom.
  • a subject may or may not be diagnosed with the disease state.
  • a subject may not suffer from the disease but can be at risk of developing the disease state.
  • the disease state or the risk to the disease state can comprise diseases related to cell growth, division, differentiation, migration, replication, or proliferation.
  • a condition can be a tumor, cancer, malignancy, neoplasm, or other proliferative disease or disorder.
  • the disease state can comprise non-Hodgkin lymphomas.
  • the disease state can comprise a B cell malignancy or a T cell malignancy.
  • the disease state can comprise, a B cell lymphoma.
  • a B cell lymphoma can comprise Diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL), Follicular lymphoma, Chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), small lymphocytic lymphoma (SLL), Mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), Marginal zone lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, Lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma (Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia), Hairy cell leukemia, Nodal marginal zone B cell lymphoma, Splenic marginal zone lymphoma,
  • Primary effusion lymphoma Lymphomatoid granulomatosis, Primary central nervous system lymphoma, ALK+ large B-cell lymphoma, Plasmablastic lymphoma, or Primary intraocular lymphoma.
  • the methods provided herein to determine a condition can comprise diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, and/or management of the condition.
  • the method can comprise measuring the gene expression and/or chromatin accessibility, such as to determine a state of the subject prior to, during, or subsequent to treatment.
  • a level of one or more regions of accessible chromatin or said one and/or more genes expressed determined from a linked signature indicative of a condition can be analyzed in a sample obtained from an individual suspected of having said condition.
  • both the one or more regions of accessible chromatin and the one and/or more genes expressed determined from a linked signature indicative of a condition are analyzed for individual cells.
  • the analysis includes detecting cells exhibiting the linked signature indicative of the condition.
  • gene expression data can be used to identify a functional gene set for upregulated genes associated with a condition and/or a particular cell type, e.g., using a tool as described by Chen et ah, “Enrichr: interactive and collaborative HTML5 gene list enrichment analysis tool” BMC Bioinformatics. 2013; 128(14); Kuleshov et ah, “Enrichr: a comprehensive gene set enrichment analysis web server 2016 update” Nucleic Acids Research. 2016; gkw377.
  • subjects who can undergo diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, or management of the condition are subjects who have increased growth or metastasis of B cell lymphoma tumor or metastasis, or subjects suspected of having B cell lymphoma.
  • the diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, or management of the condition is performed on an in vitro biological sample.
  • the subject is identified as having B cell lymphoma with a surgically excised tissue biopsy.
  • An excision biopsy of a lymph node or other tissues, depending on the types of B cell lymphomas, can be tested with immunocytochemistry, flow cytometry, fluorescent in situ hybridization, or DNA/RNA, including, but not limited to, QPCR, digital PCR, DNA sequencing, or RNA sequencing.
  • DLBCL cells ae CD45 positive and express CD 19, CD20, CD22, CD79a, and only express one of k or A. immunoglobin light chains.
  • a subject being evaluated, monitored, or managed with B cell lymphoma can also comprise receiving a CT scan. The CT scan can be used to measure tumor masses and frequencies of disease-related symptoms.
  • B cell lymphoma-related symptoms can comprise night sweats, fever, weight loss, fatigue, appetite loss, redouble breathing, abdominal pain, swollen abdomen, chest pain, coughing, swollen lymph nodes, severe itching, or any combination thereof.
  • the diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, or management of B cell lymphoma can be based on the B cell lymphoma tumor growth, B cell lymphoma lesion number, B cell lymphoma cell number, or any combination thereof. The subject may suffer from, or be at risk of, any condition.
  • linked signatures e.g., feature linkages
  • the linked signature comprises a correlation of (i) sequencing information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules of the cell or cell nucleus, and (ii) sequencing information corresponding to a plurality of ribonucleic acid (RNA) molecules (or derivatives thereof) of the cell or cell nucleus, wherein the linked signature of at least one region of accessible chromatin and expression of at least one RNA at a significant level within the biological sample is indicative of a condition of the cell or cell nucleus.
  • DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
  • RNA ribonucleic acid
  • in vitro methods for preparing a biological sample comprising: processing open chromatin structures of the T-cells and/or B-cells from the biological sample with a transposase to provide a plurality of DNA molecules; generating a first plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising the plurality of DNA molecules; generating a second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprising a plurality of nuclei c acids comprising mRNA sequences or derivatives thereof from the T-cells and/or B-cells from the biological sample; and generating a first and second sequencing library from the first and second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules, respectively, to determine a linked signature of a cell of the T-cells and/or B-cells.
  • the feature linkages can be used to determine correlated gene expression and open chromatin regions across the genome. In some cases, the feature linkages (e.g., linked signatures) can be used to determine gene regulatory networks. In some cases, a significance level for the linked signature can be determined.
  • a biological sample isolated and obtained from an individual is provided and processed ex vivo. In some aspects, the method further comprises obtaining the biological sample from the individual. In some aspects, the method may include, but not require, the further step of obtaining the biological sample from the individual.
  • the preparing and processing of the biological sample is performed ex vivo.
  • the generation of the first and/or second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules can be performed within a plurality of partitions.
  • the method includes reverse transcribing the plurality of mRNA sequences from the T-cells and/or B-cells from the biological sample to provide a plurality of complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules, and the second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules comprises the cDNA molecules.
  • the method includes barcoding 3’ ends of the mRNA.
  • the method comprises encapsulating single nuclei of the T-cells and/or B- cells in droplets.
  • the droplets can be formed prior to generating the first and/or second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules. In some embodiments, generating of the first and second plurality of barcoded nucleic acid molecules is performed at the same time. [00284] In some embodiments, the method further includes determining from the first and second sequencing libraries a presence, absence, and/or level of the one or more linked signatures correlated with a condition.
  • the condition is a tumor, cancer, malignancy, neoplasm, or other proliferative disease or disorder. In some instances, the condition is a B cell malignancy (e.g., B cell lymphoma).
  • one or more biomarkers can be identified or selected using the feature linkages (e.g., linked signatures).
  • one or more biomarkers for diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, or management of a condition (e.g., B cell lymphoma) in subjects can be selected from FIG. 50.
  • the one or more biomarkers (e.g., genes) identified can be differentially expressed between B cells and tumor B cells.
  • a linked signature of a cell or cell nucleus from a subject can be compared to a control linked signature of a control cell or cell nucleus of a control sample.
  • An agent of a given dosage may be administered to a subject suffering from, or at risk of, a condition.
  • the administration of the agent may be given continuously.
  • the dose of the agent may be temporarily reduced or temporarily suspended for a certain length of time (e.g., a “drug holiday”).
  • the length of the drug holiday can be on the order of hours, days, months, and years.
  • the dose reduction during such drug holiday may be by any amount.
  • the subject may be administered a maintenance dosage, for example, at the discretion of the administrator. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, can be reduced.
  • Subjects may receive intermittent treatment upon any recurrence of the condition.
  • Subjects undergoing diagnostic evaluation, prognostic evaluation, monitoring, or management of a disease can be administered a therapeutically effective amount of an agent.
  • the amount of a given agent that is administered to a subject may correspond to and vary depending upon factors such as the particular agent, the severity of the disease, the identity (e.g., weight) of the subject or host in need of treatment, but can nevertheless be routinely determined in a manner known in the art according to the particular circumstances surrounding the case, including, e.g., the specific agent being administered, the route of administration, and the subject or host being treated.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount and “effective amount” of a compound generally refer to an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment, prevention and/or management of a disease, to delay or minimize one or more symptoms associated with the disease or disorder to be treated.
  • therapeutically effective amount and “effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease or disorder, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of another therapeutic agent.
  • the desired dose(s) may conveniently be presented in a single dose or as divided doses administered simultaneously (or over a short period of time) or at appropriate intervals, for example as two, three, four or more sub-doses per day.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of an agent can be determined as an amount or dose of agent that can alter a linked signature of a condition or a risk, as determined from a sample(s) of the subject, to a linked signature of not having the disease or the risk of the disease, such as determined from a control sample, when administered to the subject.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of an agent can comprise the amount of the agent that changes a similarity of the linked signature of the subject and that of a reference linked signature (e.g., known to have the condition, or known not to have the condition) by at least about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 99%, or more.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of an agent can decrease a tumor size or the frequency of disease-related symptoms after administering the dose of the agent by at least 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 99%, or more. In some embodiments, the therapeutically effective amount can decrease at least 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 99%, or more in B cell lymphoma tumor growth,
  • B cell lymphoma lesion number B cell lymphoma cell number, or any combination thereof after administering the dose of the agent.
  • the methods provided herein and thereof can be used to identify one or more regions of accessible chromatin and/or one or more genes expressed as a target or targets for a therapeutically effective agent.
  • the method can identify a target region or regions of accessible chromatin having the same accessibility in the cells with the same condition.
  • the method can identify a target gene or genes expressed by the cells with the same condition.
  • the method can identify a target gene or genes not expressed by the cells with the same condition.
  • the method can identify a target gene or genes expressed to about the same extent by the cells with the same condition.
  • a therapeutically effective agent can comprise a small molecule, a nucleic acid, a polypeptide, a radiation, or a probiotic.
  • the chromatin accessibility of a target region can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent.
  • the chromatin accessibility of a target region can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent to diverge from that of a cell with a known condition.
  • the chromatin accessibility of a target region can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent to mimic that of a cell without a condition.
  • the expression of a target gene can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent.
  • the expression of a target gene can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent to diverge from that of a cell with a condition. In other embodiments, the expression of a target gene can be modified by a therapeutically effective agent to mimic that of a cell without a condition.
  • a therapeutically effective agent can be formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • the parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • Administration or application of a therapeutically effective agent disclosed herein can be performed for a treatment duration of at least about at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
  • a treatment duration can be from about 1 to about 30 days, from about 2 to about 30 days, from about 3 to about 30 days, from about 4 to about 30 days, from about 5 to about 30 days, from about 6 to about 30 days, from about 7 to about 30 days, from about 8 to about 30 days, from about 9 to about 30 days, from about 10 to about 30 days, from about 11 to about 30 days, from about 12 to about 30 days, from about 13 to about 30 days, from about 14 to about 30 days, from about 15 to about 30 days, from about 16 to about 30 days, from about 17 to about 30 days, from about 18 to about 30 days, from about 19 to about 30 days, from about 20 to about 30 days, from about 21 to about 30 days, from about 22 to about 30 days, from about 23 to about 30 days, from about 24 to about 30 days, from about 25 to about 30 days,
  • Administration or application of a composition disclosed herein can be performed for a treatment duration of at least about 1 week, at least about 1 month, at least about 1 year, at least about 2 years, at least about 3 years, at least about 4 years, at least about 5 years, at least about 6 years, at least about 7 years, at least about 8 years, at least about 9 years, at least about 10 years, at least about 15 years, at least about 20 years, or more.
  • Administration can be performed repeatedly over a lifetime of a subject, such as once a month or once a year for the lifetime of a subject.
  • Administration can be performed repeatedly over a substantial portion of a subject’s life, such as once a month or once a year for at least about 1 year, 5 years, 10 years, 15 years, 20 years, 25 years, 30 years, or more.
  • Administration or application of a therapeutically effective agent disclosed herein can be performed at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, or 24 times a day. In some cases, administration or application of composition disclosed
  • composition disclosed herein can be performed at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or 21 times a week.
  • administration or application of composition disclosed herein can be performed at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74,
  • a therapeutically effective agent can be administered/applied as a single dose or as divided doses.
  • the agents described herein can be administered at a first time point and a second time point.
  • an agent can be administered such that a first administration is administered before the other with a difference in administration time of 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 16 hours, 20 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 4 days, 7 days, 2 weeks, 4 weeks, 2 months,
  • agents disclosed herein can be in unit dose forms or multiple-dose forms.
  • a therapeutically effective agent described herein can be in unit dose form.
  • Unit dose forms refer to physically discrete units suitable for administration to human or non-human subjects (e.g., pets, livestock, non-human primates, and the like) and packaged individually.
  • Each unit dose can contain a predetermined quantity of an active ingredient(s) that can be sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with pharmaceutical carriers, diluents, excipients, or any combination thereof.
  • unit dose forms can include ampules, syringes, and individually packaged tablets and capsules.
  • a unit dose form can be comprised in a food.
  • unit-dosage forms can be administered in fractions or multiples thereof.
  • a multiple-dose form can be a plurality of identical unit dose forms packaged in a single container, which can be administered in segregated a unit dose form. Examples of a multiple-dose form can include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules, bottles of gummies, or bottles of pints or gallons.
  • a multiple-dose form can comprise different pharmaceutically active agents.
  • a unit dose form can be a serving.
  • a multiple-dose form can have more than about: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or 200 servings.
  • a multiple-dose form can have less than about: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or 200 servings. In some instances, a multiple- dose form can have from about: 1 serving to about 200 servings, 1 serving to about 20 servings,
  • the methods provided herein and thereof to determine a condition can be used to monitor a condition prior to, during, or subsequent to the administration of a therapeutically effective agent.
  • the therapeutically effective dose, dosing regimens, administration route of an agent can be modified based on the monitoring of a condition. Such modification can decrease or increase therapeutically effective dose, dosing regimens, administration route of an agent.
  • the monitoring of a condition can comprise switching, adding, or removing a therapeutically effective agent.
  • FIG. 43 a general schematic workflow 4300 is provided in FIG. 43 to illustrate a non-limiting example process of a feature linkage analysis workflow for feature linkage analysis.
  • the workflow 4300 can include various combinations of features, whether it be more or less features than that illustrated in FIG. 43. As such, FIG. 43 simply illustrates one example of a possible workflow for conducting feature linkage analysis.
  • FIG. 43 provides a schematic workflow 4300 for conducting feature linkage analysis. It should be appreciated that the methodologies described in the workflow 4300 of FIG. 43 and accompanying descriptions can be implemented independently of the methodologies for generating single cell gene expression sequencing data or single cell ATAC sequencing data described in general. Therefore, FIG. 43 can be implemented independently of a sequencing data generating workflow as long as it is capable of sufficiently analyzing single cell sequencing data sets for feature linkage analysis.
  • the data analysis workflow can include one or more of the analysis operations illustrated in FIG. 43. Not all the operations within the disclosure of FIG. 43 need to be utilized as a group. Therefore, some of the operations within FIG. 43 are capable of independently performing the necessary data analysis as part of the various embodiments disclosed herein. Accordingly, it is understood that, certain operations within the disclosure can be used either independently or in combination with other operations within the disclosure, while certain other operations within the disclosure can only be used in combination with certain other operations within the disclosure. Further, one or more of the operations described below, presumably defaulted to be utilized as part of the computational pipeline, can also not be utilized per user input. It is understood that the reverse is also contemplated. It is further understood that additional operations for analyzing the generated sequencing data are also contemplated as part of the computational pipeline within the disclosure.
  • a joint feature-barcode matrix may be generated and received.
  • the joint feature-barcode matrix can be generated by gene expression data processing and ATAC data processing.
  • the joint cell barcode matrix may comprise the counts of fragment ends (cut sites) within each peak region for each barcode and the counts of UMIs for each barcode.
  • the joint feature-barcode matrix may be normalized to generate a normalized matrix.
  • the normalization may reduce the bias introduced by the variance of totals signals per single cell.
  • the total signals per cell alternatively referred as depth, can be the sum of unique molecular identifiers (UMIs) for gene expression or the sum of total cut sites in ATAC.
  • UMIs unique molecular identifiers
  • Normalization may comprise selecting genomic features detected in each of a plurality of cells within a pre-set size of genomic window, for example, 100 kb, 200 kb, 300 kb, 400 kb, 500 kb, 600 kb, 700 kb, 800 kb, 900 kb, 1 Mb, 1.5 Mb, 2 Mb, or any intermediate ranges or values therefrom.
  • Normalization may further comprise using a depth adaptive negative binomial distribution model to model molecular counts of the joint feature-barcode matrix, in which the mean of the distribution for every genomic feature is assumed to vary linearly with the library size for each cell.
  • the negative binomial distribution is a probability distribution that is used with discrete random variables. This type of distribution concerns the number of trials that must occur in order to have a predetermined number of successes.
  • the depth adaptive negative binomial distribution model may be applied to at least two data types, including, but not limited to, both gene expression data and ATAC data.
  • normalized matrix count xy is a standardized value of raw count xy based on a non-limiting exemplary formula as shown below:
  • xy is entry of the feature-barcode matrix for feature i and cell j and xy is the normalized value for feature i and cell j .
  • m hat and r hat represent the negative binomial mean and dispersion.
  • the joint feature-barcode matrix may be smoothed by K-nearest neighbors (KNN) distance and Gaussian kernel to generate a cell-cell similarity matrix.
  • KNN K-nearest neighbors
  • smoothing may be performed so the value of a feature in a given cell is enhanced by “borrowing” values of the same feature from “neighboring” cells.
  • neighboring cells describe a population of cells whose gene expression profile or ATAC profile share a high similarity, i.e., a low distance.
  • the distance is an Euclidean distance.
  • the Euclidean distance or Euclidean metric is the "ordinary" straight-line distance between two points in Euclidean space.
  • the high similarity may be determined by applying a K-nearest neighbor algorithm called “Ball-Tree” on the principal component analysis (PCA)-reduced dimension.
  • PCA principal component analysis
  • the ball tree nearest-neighbor algorithm examines nodes in depth-first order, starting at the root. During the search, the algorithm maintains a max-first priority queue (often implemented with a heap), denoted Q here, of the K nearest points encountered so far.
  • Q max-first priority queue
  • Principal component analysis refers to a main linear technique for dimensionality reduction and performs a linear mapping of the data to a lower-dimensional space in such a way that the variance of the data in the low-dimensional representation is maximized.
  • Smoothing comprises “borrowing” information from neighboring cells.
  • the cell-to-cell similarity matrix may determine the smoothing weights.
  • the smoothing weights may be determined as the Euclidean distance based on the gene expression principal components, such that weight Wij is only positive if cells i and j are neighbors and there are no self-edges.
  • raw distances can be normalized using a Gaussian kernel:
  • smoothing weights are high only when two cells have a highly similar gene expression profile and quickly decays to zero when the similarity between cells decreases.
  • the ‘kernel’ for smoothing defines the shape of the function that is used to take the average of the neighboring points.
  • a Gaussian kernel is a kernel with the shape of a Gaussian (normal distribution) curve.
  • a smoothed matrix may be generated by the normalized matrix from operation 4320 and the cell-cell similarity matrix from operation 4330.
  • the smoothed matrix may be generated by multiplying the normalized matrix with the cell -cell similarity matrix.
  • Linkage correlation is the direct measure of the strength of the linkage, with the value bound by [-1, 1] The sign of the correlation indicates a positive or negative association. It provides a very interpretable measure of the linkage strength.
  • feature linkage correlations may be generated by computing a Pearson correlation coefficient between two genomic features detected in each of a plurality of cells as the linkage correlation after smoothing.
  • Pearson's correlation coefficient for vector X and Y of the same length may be computed as:
  • ⁇ (xl, yl), (x2, y2), .. (xn, yn) ⁇ are the paired data of X and Y
  • i is a cell number (1, 2, 3, N)
  • n is the sample size.
  • the workflow 4300 can comprise, at operation 4370, generating feature linkage significances.
  • feature linkage significances may be generated as a probability score.
  • Significance of feature linkage provides measures of statistical uncertainty for feature linkage inference and offers more contrast of strong linkages relative to weak linkages. Significance may be generated by determining a local correlation value for a linkage between at least two genomic features detected in each of a plurality of cells and transform the value to a Gaussian random variable. This method allows for hypothesis testing.
  • linkage significance is computed using a modified algorithm based on improvements and extensions of local correlation from Hotspot (DeTomaso et ah, DeTomaso,
  • the local correlation Z score may be extended to a hypothesis-testing framework to generate a probability score. Because the Z score follows a Gaussian distribution of mean 0 and variance 1 based on the normalization operation as described above, it can be converted to a probability score and subject to multiple testing correction.
  • the resulting value is a false discovery rate for whether a given pair of features x and y are significantly correlated.
  • the workflow 4300 can comprise, at operation 4370, sparsity generation.
  • a sparse statistical model is one in which only a relatively small number of parameters (or predictors) play an important role. Because the number of computable linkages is quadratic of the number of features, and it is expected that majority of computable linkages are not biologically significant, it is natural to expect sparsity in the inference of feature linkage.
  • thresholding may use a feature significance threshold, such as significance more than or equal to 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6 or any intermediate ranges or values derived therefrom for selecting for feature linkages.
  • thresholding may be set using a value of correlation, for example, feature linkages with a correlation value more than 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5 or any intermediate values or ranges may be selected and set as a threshold for selecting for feature linkages.
  • the sparsity- generation may use thresholding, which is to exclude linkages with a pre-set threshold on correlation or significance. Thresholding may be a particular example of sparsity-generating strategy based on its simplicity, interpretability, and good consistency against differential expression.
  • the sparsity-generation may use Gaussian graphical models (GGM).
  • GGM is an undirected graph in which each edge represents the pairwise correlation between two variables conditioned against the correlations with all other variables (also denoted as partial correlation coefficients).
  • GGMs have a simple interpretation in terms of linear regression techniques. When regressing two random variables X and Y on the remaining variables in the data set, the partial correlation coefficient between X and Y can be determined by the Pearson correlation of the residuals from both regressions. Intuitively speaking, we remove the (linear) effects of all other variables on X and Y and compare the remaining signals. If the variables are still correlated, the correlation is directly determined by the association of X and Y and not mediated by the other variables.
  • GGM-based methods including, but not being limited to, graphical lasso, relaxed graphical lasso, sparse estimation of covariance, and sparse Steinian covariance estimation.
  • the benefit of GGM is that it has a strong statistics framework and allows linkage-specific regularization.
  • GGM based on optimizing the precision matrix creates false negative, in which strong linkages can be erroneously determined to be zero.
  • GGM that optimizing the covariance matrix may need to be used to improve GGM- based sparsity generation.
  • the workflow 4300 can comprise, at operation 4380, generating a feature linkage matrix after sparsity generation for downstream analysis.
  • methods are provided for feature linkage analysis.
  • the methods can be implemented via computer software or hardware.
  • the methods can also be implemented on a computing device/system that can include a combination of engines for feature linkage analysis.
  • the computing device/system can be communicatively connected to one or more of a data source, sample analyzer (e.g., a genomic sequence analyzer), and display device via a direct connection or through an internet connection.
  • sample analyzer e.g., a genomic sequence analyzer
  • display device via a direct connection or through an internet connection.
  • FIG. 44 a flowchart illustrating a non-limiting example method 4400 for feature linkage analysis is disclosed, in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the method can comprise, at operation 4402, receiving a data matrix comprising at least two genomic features detected in each of a plurality of cells.
  • genomic features can be gene expression features (such as genes and mRNA) and assay for transposase- accessible chromatin (ATAC) features (such as open chromatin regions or accessible chromatin regions).
  • the data matrix may be a joint feature-barcode matrix that comprises data of both cut sites and UMIs for each barcode.
  • the data matrix may be generated from single-cell sequencing as discussed above, sci-CAR or SNARE- seq, or a combination thereof.
  • the method can comprise, at operation 4404, smoothing the data matrix to generate a smoothed matrix, wherein smoothing the data matrix comprises normalizing the first genomic feature and the second genomic feature identified for each cell in the data matrix with the first and second genomic features from a subset of neighboring cells.
  • Normalizing the data matrix may comprise using a depth-adaptive negative binomial distribution model to model molecular counts of the data matrix, such as joint feature-barcode matrix.
  • the method can comprise, at operation 4406, generating linkage correlations between the first genomic feature and second genomic feature identified for each of the plurality of cells in the data matrix.
  • feature linkage correlations may be generated by computing a Pearson correlation coefficient between two genomic features as the linkage correlation after smoothing.
  • the method can comprise, at operation 4408, generating linkage significances of the linkage correlations of pairs of the first and second genomic features identified for each of the plurality of cells in the data matrix.
  • feature linkage significances may be generated as a probability score.
  • the feature linkage significances can be generated by using multiplication of a plurality of linkage matrixes.
  • Each linkage matrix can comprise linkage correlations of pairs of the first and second genomic features identified for each of the plurality of cells in the data matrix.
  • the feature linkage significances may be generated using a matrix multiplication.
  • this matrix multiplication local correlation of a N pairs of features (for example, 10,000 pairs of features), denoted as the Z score “Zxy hat”, can be generated in one operation of operation instead of a loop of N operations (for example, 10,000 operations).
  • the method can comprise, at operation 4410, outputting the linkage correlations and linkage significances.
  • the feature linkages, correlations, and/or significances can be used as a linked signature for a biological particle (e.g., a cell and/or cell nucleus).
  • a biological particle e.g., a cell and/or cell nucleus
  • feature linkages, correlations, and/or significances can be used to generate a plurality of linked signatures for each of a plurality of biological particles (e.g., cells and/or cell nuclei).
  • FIG. 40 illustrates an example workflow for a method of identifying a genetic feature corresponding to an expressed protein.
  • chromatin sequencing information and gene expression sequencing information is associated with cells and/or cell nuclei.
  • the cells and/or cell nuclei are characterizing as corresponding to specific cell types.
  • gene expression sequencing information is used to identify an expressed protein.
  • chromatin sequencing information is used to identify a genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element (e.g., a promoter or enhancer) corresponding to the expressed protein.
  • a genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element (e.g., a promoter or enhancer) corresponding to the expressed protein.
  • a plurality of cells or cell nuclei subjected to analysis provided herein may comprise at least 500 cells.
  • the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may comprise at least 500, 1,000, 2,000, 5,000, 7,500, 10,000, or more cells or cell nuclei.
  • a genetic feature that may be relevant to the differentially expressed protein may be upstream of a nearby gene.
  • the genetic feature may be downstream of a nearby gene.
  • the genetic feature may be disposed substantially far from the gene that it may influence.
  • a cis-regulatory element may be a region of non-coding DNA that regulates transcription of a nearby gene.
  • a cis-regulatory element may be upstream of a transcription site.
  • a cis-regulatory element such as an enhancer may be downstream of a gene it regulates.
  • a cis-regulatory element may be, for example, a promoter, enhancer, operator, or silencer.
  • a promoter may occur at a site where transcription is initiated.
  • a promoter may include one or more of a TATA box, a transcription factor II B (TFIIB) recognition site, an initiator, and a core promoter element.
  • An enhancer may influence (e.g., enhance) the transcription of a gene.
  • a cis-regulatory element that modulates a gene may be one of a plurality of cis-regulatory elements (e.g., promoters and enhancers) that influences transcription of the gene.
  • a cis-regulatory element may alternatively be a silencer or operator that may repress transcription of a gene.
  • a genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element may be correlated with epigenetic markers, such as epigenetic markers included in databases such as the curated GeneHancer database.
  • An epigenetic marker may comprise a differentially methylated region.
  • An example of an epigenetic modification is H3K4mel, which includes mono-methylation at the 4 th lysine residue of the histone H3 protein.
  • H3K4mel is an enhancer signature for various genes.
  • the methods provided herein may facilitate prediction of relative protein expression across various cell types.
  • promoter peaks measurable in accessible chromatin data across a group of cell types corresponding to a given protein may not predictive of protein expression.
  • correlation of the promoter peaks with an additional genetic feature e.g., a cis-regulatory element, as described above
  • This information may be useful in developing diagnostic methods and therapies for disease types including various cancers.
  • chromatin information may also be used to analyze activation and/or de-activation of other proteins including signal transducer (e.g., signal transducer and activator of transcription (STAT)) proteins.
  • signal transducer e.g., signal transducer and activator of transcription (STAT)
  • STAT activator of transcription
  • activation of latent proteins such as STAT proteins may be analyzed.
  • latent cytoplasmic proteins making expression a poor proxy for function.
  • Chromatin information may be used to identify accessibility of a given binding motif for such a protein and thus activation of the protein for a given cell type (e.g., for a tumor cell type).
  • the methods described herein may be applied to analysis of cell populations including diseased cells such as tumor cells.
  • the methods provided herein may comprise using sequencing information to identify a presence of a tumor cell or cell nucleus in a sample.
  • the methods provided herein may be useful in diagnostic evaluations.
  • the methods provided herein may also or alternatively comprise using sequencing information to identify a cell type, a cell state, a tumor-specific gene expression pattern, or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin in a sample. Based at least in part on such analysis, a therapeutic regimen may be identified, e.g., for a subject from which a sample derives.
  • a therapeutic regimen may comprise administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an agent targeting one or more targets identified in a tumor-specific gene expression pattern or a tumor-specific differentially accessible region of chromatin.
  • the methods provided herein may also be applied to identify single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) associated to various diseases. Other methods for associating SNPs with specific diseases may rely on analysis of regions of chromatin that are readily linked to expressed proteins.
  • the present disclosure improves upon such methods by providing a mechanism for identifying genetic features (e.g., regulatory regions) that may be correlated to gene expression by specific cell types, including diseased cells.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for identifying a single nucleotide polymorphism or other genetic feature associated with a disease.
  • the method may comprise providing a first data set corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin of a plurality of DNA molecules (e.g., chromatin) of a plurality of cells or cell nuclei and a second data set corresponding to a plurality of RNA molecules of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • the first data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a first plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the regions of accessible chromatin and a plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • the second data set may comprise sequencing information (e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads) corresponding to sequences of the plurality of RNA molecules and the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • sequencing information e.g., a second plurality of sequencing reads
  • a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei may correspond to a nucleic acid barcode sequences of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences.
  • a particle comprising a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules comprising a common nucleic acid barcode sequence of the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences may be used to process the plurality of DNA molecules and RNA molecules of a cell or cell nucleus of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei (e.g., within a partition) (as described herein).
  • the plurality of nucleic acid barcode sequences of the first data set and the second data set may be used to identify first sequencing reads of the first plurality of sequencing reads and second sequencing reads of the second plurality of sequencing reads as corresponding to cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei, thereby generating a third data set comprising sequence information corresponding to regions of accessible chromatin and RNA molecules associated with cells or cell nuclei of the plurality of cells or cell nuclei.
  • Cell types of the cells or cell nuclei may be identified using the sequence information of the third data set.
  • the sequence information corresponding to the RNA molecules may be used to identify an expressed protein of a cell type of the identified cell types, such as a protein that is differentially expressed for a diseased cell state.
  • sequence information corresponding to the regions of accessible chromatin may be used to identify an SNP or other genetic feature such as a cis-regulatory element corresponding to the expressed protein, thereby identifying an SNP or other genetic feature associated with a diseased cell state.
  • a feature linkage matrix generated from operation 4380 of the workflow 4300 can be used for further downstream analysis, e.g., to construct a transcriptional network or transcription factor (TF) network.
  • TF transcription factor
  • FIG. 47 an exemplary workflow for constructing a TF networks is depicted in FIG. 47.
  • peaks and genes can be filtered using motif enrichment and differential expression analysis, respectively. The remaining peaks can be further mapped to motifs.
  • a 3 -step method for constructing a transcriptional network can be used.
  • differentially expressed gene in tumor cells are used to generate a list of genes upregulated in a particular condition (e.g., in tumor cells) by setting the threshold of p-value (e.g., ⁇ 10 L -20).
  • the gene list can be intersected with the inferred feature linkages to identify the peaks linked to the condition (e.g., tumor-specific genes).
  • motif enrichment analysis can be used to identify transcription factors with enriched motif occurrence in tumor cells.
  • the enriched transcription factors with linked target genes can be used to define the edges of the TF regulatory network.
  • the method comprises performing motif enrichment analysis.
  • transcription factor motifs with increased accessibility in a condition can be identified (e.g., in tumor B cells over normal B cells).
  • global enrichment is performed comprising estimating enrichment using all peaks between two populations (e.g., two cell or nucleic populations).
  • TF deviation z scores can be evaluated using chromVAR and two-sample t tests for every motif between the two populations (e.g., between tumor cells and normal B cells).
  • the inferred mean difference between the two populations is further z scored as the enrichment score.
  • the method comprises identifying motifs enrichment only in the peaks with linkage to the top tumor- upregulated genes.
  • context-dependent enrichment is performed comprising enrichment estimated under the tumor context by comparing potential tumor-specific enhancers with a set of background peaks sharing the GC and accessibility profile in tumor cells.
  • a set of background peaks can be computed using a similar strategy as chromVAR, with modification of matching GC content and peak size, instead of the GC content and cut sites per cell.
  • the motif enrichment is determined by hypergeometric tests of motif occurrences in enhancer peaks and background peaks.
  • one or more enrichment motifs are identified (e.g., top ranked motifs in global analysis and the top ranked motifs in context-specific analysis).
  • redundancy of TF motif sequences can be removed and further processed, e.g., by grouping the identified motifs into families based on motif clustering (Fornes et al., (2020) Nucleic Acids Research, 48( D1):D87-D92).
  • the systems and methods described herein provide for the compartmentalization, depositing, or partitioning of one or more particles (e.g., biological particles, macromolecular constituents of biological particles, beads, reagents, etc.) into discrete compartments or partitions (referred to interchangeably herein as partitions), where each partition maintains separation of its own contents from the contents of other partitions.
  • the partition can be a droplet in an emulsion or a well.
  • a partition may comprise one or more other partitions.
  • a partition may include one or more particles.
  • a partition may include one or more types of particles.
  • a partition of the present disclosure may comprise one or more biological particles and/or macromolecular constituents thereof.
  • a partition may comprise one or more beads.
  • a partition may comprise one or more gel beads.
  • a partition may comprise one or more cell beads.
  • a partition may include a single gel bead, a single cell bead, or both a single cell bead and single gel bead.
  • a partition may include one or more reagents.
  • a partition may be unoccupied.
  • a partition may not comprise a bead.
  • a cell bead can be an biological particle and/or one or more of its macromolecular constituents encased inside of a gel or polymer matrix, such as via polymerization of a droplet containing the biological particle and precursors capable of being polymerized or gelled.
  • Unique identifiers such as barcodes, may be injected into the droplets previous to, subsequent to, or concurrently with droplet generation, such as via a microcapsule (e.g., bead), as described elsewhere herein.
  • the methods and systems of the present disclosure may comprise methods and systems for generating one or more partitions such as droplets.
  • the droplets may comprise a plurality of droplets in an emulsion.
  • the droplets may comprise droplets in a colloid.
  • the emulsion may comprise a microemulsion or a nanoemulsion.
  • the droplets may be generated with aid of a microfluidic device and/or by subjecting a mixture of immiscible phases to agitation (e.g., in a container).
  • a combination of the mentioned methods may be used for droplet and/or emulsion formation.
  • Droplets can be formed by creating an emulsion by mixing and/or agitating immiscible phases.
  • Mixing or agitation may comprise various agitation techniques, such as vortexing, pipetting, tube flicking, or other agitation techniques.
  • mixing or agitation may be performed without using a microfluidic device.
  • the droplets may be formed by exposing a mixture to ultrasound or sonication.
  • Microfluidic devices or platforms comprising microfluidic channel networks can be utilized to generate partitions such as droplets and/or emulsions as described herein.
  • Methods and systems for generating partitions such as droplets, methods of encapsulating biological particlemethods of increasing the throughput of droplet generation, and various geometries, architectures, and configurations of microfluidic devices and channels are described in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2019/0367997 and 2019/0064173, each of which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • individual particles can be partitioned to discrete partitions by introducing a flowing stream of particles in an aqueous fluid into a flowing stream or reservoir of a non-aqueous fluid, such that droplets may be generated at the junction of the two streams/reservoir, such as at the junction of a microfluidic device provided elsewhere herein.
  • the methods of the present disclosure may comprise generating partitions and/or encapsulating particles, such as analyte carriers or analyte carriers, in some cases, individual analyte carriers such as single cells.
  • reagents may be encapsulated and/or partitioned (e.g., co-partitioned with analyte carriers) in the partitions.
  • partitioned e.g., co-partitioned with analyte carriers
  • Various mechanisms may be employed in the partitioning of individual particles.
  • An example may comprise porous membranes through which aqueous mixtures of cells may be extruded into fluids (e.g., non- aqueous fluids).
  • the partitions can be flowable within fluid streams.
  • the partitions may comprise, for example, micro-vesicles that have an outer barrier surrounding an inner fluid center or core.
  • the partitions may comprise a porous matrix that is capable of entraining and/or retaining materials within its matrix.
  • the partitions can be droplets of a first phase within a second phase, wherein the first and second phases are immiscible.
  • the partitions can be droplets of aqueous fluid within a non-aqueous continuous phase (e.g., oil phase).
  • the partitions can be droplets of a non-aqueous fluid within an aqueous phase.
  • the partitions may be provided in a water-in-oil emulsion or oil-in-water emulsion.
  • a variety of different vessels are described in, for example, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0155295, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • Emulsion systems for creating stable droplets in non-aqueous or oil continuous phases are described in, for example, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0105112, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • Fluid properties e.g., fluid flow rates, fluid viscosities, etc.
  • particle properties e.g., volume fraction, particle size, particle concentration, etc.
  • microfluidic architectures e.g., channel geometry, etc.
  • partition occupancy can be controlled by providing the aqueous stream at a certain concentration and/or flow rate of particles.
  • the relative flow rates of the immiscible fluids can be selected such that, on average, the partitions may contain less than one biological particle per partition in order to ensure that those partitions that are occupied are primarily singly occupied.
  • partitions among a plurality of partitions may contain at most one biological particle (e.g., bead, DNA, cell or cellular material).
  • the various parameters e.g., fluid properties, particle properties, microfluidic architectures, etc.
  • the flows and channel architectures can be controlled as to ensure a given number of singly occupied partitions, less than a certain level of unoccupied partitions and/or less than a certain level of multiply occupied partitions.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of a microfluidic channel structure 100 for partitioning individual biological particles.
  • the channel structure 100 can include channel segments 102, 104, 106 and 108 communicating at a channel junction 110.
  • a first aqueous fluid 112 that includes suspended biological particles (or cells) 114 may be transported along channel segment 102 into junction 110, while a second fluid 116 that is immiscible with the aqueous fluid 112 is delivered to the junction 110 from each of channel segments 104 and 106 to create discrete droplets 118, 120 of the first aqueous fluid 112 flowing into channel segment 108, and flowing away from junction 110.
  • the channel segment 108 may be fluidically coupled to an outlet reservoir where the discrete droplets can be stored and/or harvested.
  • a discrete droplet generated may include an individual biological particle 114 (such as droplets 118).
  • a discrete droplet generated may include more than one individual biological particle 114 (not shown in FIG. 1).
  • a discrete droplet may contain no biological particle 114 (such as droplet 120).
  • Each discrete partition may maintain separation of its own contents (e.g., individual biological particle 114) from the contents of other partitions.
  • the second fluid 116 can comprise an oil, such as a fluorinated oil, that includes a fluorosurfactant for stabilizing the resulting droplets, for example, inhibiting subsequent coalescence of the resulting droplets 118, 120.
  • an oil such as a fluorinated oil
  • fluorosurfactant for stabilizing the resulting droplets, for example, inhibiting subsequent coalescence of the resulting droplets 118, 120.
  • the channel segments described herein may be coupled to any of a variety of different fluid sources or receiving components, including reservoirs, tubing, manifolds, or fluidic components of other systems.
  • the microfluidic channel structure 100 may have other geometries.
  • a microfluidic channel structure can have more than one channel junction.
  • a microfluidic channel structure can have 2, 3, 4, or 5 channel segments each carrying particles (e.g., biological particles, cell beads, and/or gel beads) that meet at a channel junction. Fluid may be directed to flow along one or more channels or reservoirs via one or more fluid flow units.
  • a fluid flow unit can comprise compressors (e.g., providing positive pressure), pumps (e.g., providing negative pressure), actuators, and the like to control flow of the fluid. Fluid may also or otherwise be controlled via applied pressure differentials, centrifugal force, electrokinetic pumping, vacuum, capillary or gravity flow, or the like.
  • the generated droplets may comprise two subsets of droplets: (1) occupied droplets 118, containing one or more biological particles 114, and (2) unoccupied droplets 120, not containing any biological particles 114.
  • Occupied droplets 118 may comprise singly occupied droplets (having one biological particle) and multiply occupied droplets (having more than one biological particle).
  • the majority of occupied partitions can include no more than one biological particle per occupied partition and some of the generated partitions can be unoccupied (of any biological particle). In some cases, though, some of the occupied partitions may include more than one biological particle.
  • the partitioning process may be controlled such that fewer than about 25% of the occupied partitions contain more than one biological particle, and in many cases, fewer than about 20% of the occupied partitions have more than one biological particle, while in some cases, fewer than about 10% or even fewer than about 5% of the occupied partitions include more than one biological particle per partition.
  • the Poissonian distribution may expectedly increase the number of partitions that include multiple biological particles. As such, where singly occupied partitions are to be obtained, at most about 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5% or less of the generated partitions can be unoccupied.
  • the flow of one or more of the biological particles (e.g., in channel segment 102), or other fluids directed into the partitioning junction (e.g., in channel segments 104, 106) can be controlled such that, in many cases, no more than about 50% of the generated partitions, no more than about 25% of the generated partitions, or no more than about 10% of the generated partitions are unoccupied.
  • These flows can be controlled so as to present a non- Poissonian distribution of single-occupied partitions while providing lower levels of unoccupied partitions.
  • the above noted ranges of unoccupied partitions can be achieved while still providing any of the single occupancy rates described above.
  • the use of the systems and methods described herein can create resulting partitions that have multiple occupancy rates of less than about 25%, less than about 20%, less than about 15%, less than about 10%, and in many cases, less than about 5%, while having unoccupied partitions of less than about 50%, less than about 40%, less than about 30%, less than about 20%, less than about 10%, less than about 5%, or less.
  • the above-described occupancy rates are also applicable to partitions that include both biological particles and additional reagents, including, but not limited to, microcapsules or beads (e.g., gel beads) carrying barcoded nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides) (described in relation to FIG. 2).
  • the occupied partitions e.g., at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the occupied partitions
  • biological particles may be encapsulated within a microcapsule that comprises an outer shell, layer or porous matrix in which is entrained one or more individual biological particles or small groups of biological particles.
  • the microcapsule may include other reagents. Encapsulation of biological particles may be performed by a variety of processes. Such processes may combine an aqueous fluid containing the biological particles with a polymeric precursor material that may be capable of being formed into a gel or other solid or semi-solid matrix upon application of a particular stimulus to the polymer precursor.
  • Such stimuli can include, for example, thermal stimuli (e.g., either heating or cooling), photo-stimuli (e.g., through photo-curing), chemical stimuli (e.g., through crosslinking, polymerization initiation of the precursor (e.g., through added initiators)), mechanical stimuli, or a combination thereof.
  • thermal stimuli e.g., either heating or cooling
  • photo-stimuli e.g., through photo-curing
  • chemical stimuli e.g., through crosslinking, polymerization initiation of the precursor (e.g., through added initiators)
  • mechanical stimuli e.g., mechanical stimuli, or a combination thereof.
  • Preparation of microcapsules comprising biological particles may be performed by a variety of methods. For example, air knife droplet or aerosol generators may be used to dispense droplets of precursor fluids into gelling solutions in order to form microcapsules that include individual biological particles or small groups of biological particles.
  • membrane based encapsulation systems may be used to generate microcapsules comprising encapsulated biological particles as described herein.
  • Microfluidic systems of the present disclosure such as that shown in FIG. 1, may be readily used in encapsulating cells as described herein.
  • the aqueous fluid 112 comprising (i) the biological particles 114 and (ii) the polymer precursor material (not shown) is flowed into channel junction 110, where it is partitioned into droplets 118, 120 through the flow of non-aqueous fluid 116.
  • non-aqueous fluid 116 may also include an initiator (not shown) to cause polymerization and/or crosslinking of the polymer precursor to form the microcapsule that includes the entrained biological particles.
  • initiator not shown
  • examples of polymer precursor/initiator pairs include those described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0378345, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • the activation agent may comprise a cross-linking agent, or a chemical that activates a cross-linking agent within the formed droplets.
  • the activation agent may comprise a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymer precursor comprises a mixture of acrylamide monomer with a N,N’- bis-(acryloyl)cystamine (BAC) comonomer
  • an agent such as tetraethylmethylenediamine (TEMED) may be provided within the second fluid streams 116 in channel segments 104 and 106, which can initiate the copolymerization of the acrylamide and BAC into a cross-linked polymer network, or hydrogel.
  • TEMED tetraethylmethylenediamine
  • the TEMED may diffuse from the second fluid 116 into the aqueous fluid 112 comprising the linear polyacrylamide, which will activate the crosslinking of the polyacrylamide within the droplets 118, 120, resulting in the formation of gel (e.g., hydrogel) microcapsules, as solid or semi-solid beads or particles entraining the cells 114.
  • gel e.g., hydrogel
  • other ‘activatable’ encapsulation compositions may also be employed in the context of the methods and compositions described herein.
  • alginate droplets followed by exposure to divalent metal ions (e.g., Ca 2+ ions), can be used as an encapsulation process using the described processes.
  • divalent metal ions e.g., Ca 2+ ions
  • agarose droplets may also be transformed into capsules through temperature based gelling (e.g., upon cooling, etc.).
  • encapsulated biological particles can be selectively releasable from the microcapsule, such as through passage of time or upon application of a particular stimulus, that degrades the microcapsule sufficiently to allow the biological particles (e.g., cell), or its other contents to be released from the microcapsule, such as into a partition (e.g., droplet).
  • a partition e.g., droplet
  • degradation of the microcapsule may be accomplished through the introduction of an appropriate reducing agent, such as DTT or the like, to cleave disulfide bonds that cross-link the polymer matrix. See, for example, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0378345, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • the biological particle can be subjected to other conditions sufficient to polymerize or gel the precursors.
  • the conditions sufficient to polymerize or gel the precursors may comprise exposure to heating, cooling, electromagnetic radiation, and/or light.
  • the conditions sufficient to polymerize or gel the precursors may comprise any conditions sufficient to polymerize or gel the precursors.
  • a polymer or gel may be formed around the biological particle.
  • the polymer or gel may be diffusively permeable to chemical or biochemical reagents.
  • the polymer or gel may be diffusively impermeable to macromolecular constituents of the biological particle.
  • the polymer or gel may act to allow the biological particle to be subjected to chemical or biochemical operations while spatially confining the macromolecular constituents to a region of the droplet defined by the polymer or gel.
  • the polymer or gel may include one or more of disulfide cross-linked polyacrylamide, agarose, alginate, polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol (PEG)-diacrylate, PEG-acrylate, PEG-thiol, PEG-azide, PEG-alkyne, other acrylates, chitosan, hyaluronic acid, collagen, fibrin, gelatin, or elastin.
  • the polymer or gel may comprise any other polymer or gel.
  • the polymer or gel may be functionalized to bind to targeted analytes, such as nucleic acids, proteins, carbohydrates, lipids or other analytes.
  • the polymer or gel may be polymerized or gelled via a passive mechanism.
  • the polymer or gel may be stable in alkaline conditions or at elevated temperature.
  • the polymer or gel may have mechanical properties similar to the mechanical properties of the bead. For instance, the polymer or gel may be of a similar size to the bead.
  • the polymer or gel may have a mechanical strength (e.g. tensile strength) similar to that of the bead.
  • the polymer or gel may be of a lower density than an oil.
  • the polymer or gel may be of a density that is roughly similar to that of a buffer.
  • the polymer or gel may have a tunable pore size.
  • the pore size may be chosen to, for instance, retain denatured nucleic acids.
  • the pore size may be chosen to maintain diffusive permeability to exogenous chemicals such as sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and/or endogenous chemicals such as inhibitors.
  • the polymer or gel may be biocompatible.
  • the polymer or gel may maintain or enhance cell viability.
  • the polymer or gel may be biochemically compatible.
  • the polymer or gel may be polymerized and/or depolymerized thermally, chemically, enzymatically, and/or optically.
  • the polymer may comprise poly(acrylamide-co-acrylic acid) crosslinked with disulfide linkages.
  • the preparation of the polymer may comprise a two-step reaction.
  • poly(acrylamide-co-acrylic acid) may be exposed to an acylating agent to convert carboxylic acids to esters.
  • the poly(acrylamide-co-acrylic acid) may be exposed to 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride (DMTMM).
  • DTMM 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride
  • the polyacrylamide-co-acrylic acid may be exposed to other salts of 4-(4,6-dimethoxy- 1,3,5 - triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium.
  • the ester formed in the first step may be exposed to a disulfide crosslinking agent.
  • the ester may be exposed to cystamine (2,2’-dithiobis(ethylamine)).
  • the biological particle may be surrounded by polyacrylamide strands linked together by disulfide bridges. In this manner, the biological particle may be encased inside of or comprise a gel or matrix (e.g., polymer matrix) to form a “cell bead.”
  • a cell bead can contain biological particles (e.g., a cell) or macromolecular constituents (e.g., RNA, DNA, proteins, etc.) of biological particles.
  • a cell bead may include a single cell or multiple cells, or a derivative of the single cell or multiple cells. For example after lysing and washing the cells, inhibitory components from cell lysates can be washed away and the macromolecular constituents can be bound as cell beads.
  • Systems and methods disclosed herein can be applicable to both cell beads (and/or droplets or other partitions) containing biological particles and cell beads (and/or droplets or other partitions) containing macromolecular constituents of biological particles.
  • Cell beads may be or include a cell, cell derivative, cellular material and/or material derived from the cell in, within, or encased in a matrix, such as a polymeric matrix.
  • a cell bead may comprise a live cell.
  • the live cell may be capable of being cultured when enclosed in a gel or polymer matrix, or of being cultured when comprising a gel or polymer matrix.
  • the polymer or gel may be diffusively permeable to certain components and diffusively impermeable to other components (e.g., macromolecular constituents).
  • Encapsulated biological particles can provide certain potential advantages of being more storable and more portable than droplet-based partitioned biological particles. Furthennore, in some cases, it may be desirable to allow biological particles to incubate for a select period of time before analysis, such as in order to characterize changes in such biological particles over time, either in the presence or absence of different stimuli (or reagents).
  • encapsulation may allow for longer incubation than partitioning in emulsion droplets, although in some cases, droplet partitioned biological particles may also be incubated for different periods of time, e.g., at least 10 seconds, at least 30 seconds, at least 1 minute, at least 5 minutes, at least 10 minutes, at least 30 minutes, at least 1 hour, at least 2 hours, at least 5 hours, or at least 10 hours or more.
  • the encapsulation of biological particles may constitute the partitioning of the biological particles into which other reagents are co-partitioned.
  • encapsulated biological particles may be readily deposited into other partitions (e.g., droplets) as described above.
  • a partition which may be a well.
  • the well may be a well of a plurality of wells of a substrate, such as a microwell of a microwell array or plate, or the well may be a microwell or microchamber of a device (e.g., microfluidic device) comprising a substrate.
  • the well may be a well of a well array or plate, or the well may be a well or chamber of a device (e.g., fluidic device).
  • the wells or microwells may assume an “open” configuration, in which the wells or microwells are exposed to the environment (e.g., contain an open surface) and are accessible on one planar face of the substrate, or the wells or microwells may assume a “closed” or “sealed” configuration, in which the microwells are not accessible on a planar face of the substrate.
  • the wells or microwells may be configured to toggle between “open” and “closed” configurations.
  • an “open” microwell or set of microwells may be “closed” or “sealed” using a membrane (e.g., semi-permeable membrane), an oil (e.g., fluorinated oil to cover an aqueous solution), or a lid, as described elsewhere herein.
  • a membrane e.g., semi-permeable membrane
  • an oil e.g., fluorinated oil to cover an aqueous solution
  • a lid e.g., a lid
  • the well may have a volume of less than 1 milliliter (mL).
  • the well may be configured to hold a volume of at most 1000 microliters (pL), at most 100 pL, at most 10 pL, at most 1 pL, at most 100 nanoliters (nL), at most 10 nL, at most 1 nL, at most 100 picoliters (pL), at most 10 (pL), or less.
  • the well may be configured to hold a volume of about 1000 pL, about 100 pL, about 10 pL, about 1 pL, about 100 nL, about 10 nL, about 1 nL, about 100 pL, about 10 pL, etc.
  • the well may be configured to hold a volume of at least 10 pL, at least 100 pL, at least 1 nL, at least 10 nL, at least 100 nL, at least 1 pL, at least 10 pL, at least 100 pL, at least 1000 pL, or more.
  • the well may be configured to hold a volume in a range of volumes listed herein, for example, from about 5 nL to about 20 nL, from about 1 nL to about 100 nL, from about 500 pL to about 100 pL, etc.
  • the well may be of a plurality of wells that have varying volumes and may be configured to hold a volume appropriate to accommodate any of the partition volumes described herein.
  • a microwell array or plate comprises a single variety of microwells.
  • a microwell array or plate comprises a variety of microwells.
  • the microwell array or plate may comprise one or more types of microwells within a single microwell array or plate.
  • the types of microwells may have different dimensions (e.g., length, width, diameter, depth, cross-sectional area, etc.), shapes (e.g., circular, triangular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal, octagonal, nonagonal, decagonal, etc.), aspect ratios, or other physical characteristics.
  • the microwell array or plate may comprise any number of different types of microwells.
  • the microwell array or plate may comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 or more different types of microwells.
  • a well may have any dimension (e.g., length, width, diameter, depth, cross-sectional area, volume, etc.), shape (e.g., circular, triangular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal, octagonal, nonagonal, decagonal, other polygonal, etc.), aspect ratios, or other physical characteristics described herein with respect to any well.
  • the microwell array or plate comprises different types of microwells that are located adjacent to one another within the array or plate. For instance, a microwell with one set of dimensions may be located adjacent to and in contact with another microwell with a different set of dimensions. Similarly, microwells of different geometries may be placed adjacent to or in contact with one another.
  • the adjacent microwells may be configured to hold different articles; for example, one microwell may be used to contain a cell, cell bead, or other sample (e.g., cellular components, nucleic acid molecules, etc.) while the adjacent microwell may be used to contain a microcapsule, droplet, bead, or other reagent.
  • the adjacent microwells may be configured to merge the contents held within, e.g., upon application of a stimulus, or spontaneously, upon contact of the articles in each microwell.
  • a plurality of partitions may be used in the systems, compositions, and methods described herein. For example, any suitable number of partitions (e.g., wells or droplets) can be generated or otherwise provided.
  • the plurality of wells may comprise both unoccupied wells (e.g., empty wells) and occupied wells.
  • a well may comprise any of the reagents described herein, or combinations thereof. These reagents may include, for example, barcode molecules, enzymes, adapters, and combinations thereof.
  • the reagents may be physically separated from a sample (e.g., a cell, cell bead, or cellular components, e.g., proteins, nucleic acid molecules, etc.) that is placed in the well. This physical separation may be accomplished by containing the reagents within, or coupling to, a microcapsule or bead that is placed within a well.
  • the physical separation may also be accomplished by dispensing the reagents in the well and overlaying the reagents with a layer that is, for example, dissolvable, meltable, or permeable prior to introducing the polynucleotide sample into the well.
  • This layer may be, for example, an oil, wax, membrane (e.g., semi-permeable membrane), or the like.
  • the well may be sealed at any point, for example, after addition of the microcapsule or bead, after addition of the reagents, or after addition of either of these components.
  • the sealing of the well may be useful for a variety of purposes, including preventing escape of beads or loaded reagents from the well, permitting select delivery of certain reagents (e.g., via the use of a semi-permeable membrane), for storage of the well prior to or following further processing, etc.
  • a well may comprise free reagents and/or reagents encapsulated in, or otherwise coupled to or associated with, microcapsules, beads, or droplets. Any of the reagents described in this disclosure may be encapsulated in, or otherwise coupled to, a microcapsule, droplet, or bead, with any chemicals, particles, and elements suitable for sample processing reactions involving biomolecules, such as, but not limited to, nucleic acid molecules and proteins.
  • a bead or droplet used in a sample preparation reaction for DNA sequencing may comprise one or more of the following reagents: enzymes, restriction enzymes (e.g., multiple cutters), ligase, polymerase, fluorophores, oligonucleotide barcodes, adapters, buffers, nucleotides (e.g., dNTPs, ddNTPs) and the like.
  • reagents include, but are not limited to: buffers, acidic solution, basic solution, temperature-sensitive enzymes, pH-sensitive enzymes, light-sensitive enzymes, metals, metal ions, magnesium chloride, sodium chloride, manganese, aqueous buffer, mild buffer, ionic buffer, inhibitor, enzyme, protein, polynucleotide, antibodies, saccharides, lipid, oil, salt, ion, detergents, ionic detergents, non-ionic detergents, oligonucleotides, nucleotides, deoxyribonucleotide triphosphates (dNTPs), dideoxyribonucleotide triphosphates (ddNTPs), DNA, RNA, peptide polynucleotides, complementary DNA (cDNA), double stranded DNA (dsDNA), single stranded DNA (ssDNA), plasmid DNA, cosmid DNA, chromosomal DNA, genomic DNA, viral DNA, bacterial DNA,
  • one or more reagents in the well may be used to perform one or more reactions, including but not limited to: cell lysis, cell fixation, permeabilization, nucleic acid reactions, e.g., nucleic acid extension reactions, amplification, reverse transcription, transposase reactions (e.g., tagmentation), etc.
  • kits may comprise instructions for use, a microwell array or device, and reagents (e.g., beads).
  • the kit may comprise any useful reagents for performing the processes described herein, e.g., nucleic acid reactions, barcoding of nucleic acid molecules, sample processing (e.g., for cell lysis, fixation, and/or permeabilization).
  • a well comprises a microcapsule, bead, or droplet that comprises a set of reagents that has a similar attribute (e.g., a set of enzymes, a set of minerals, a set of oligonucleotides, a mixture of different barcode molecules, a mixture of identical barcode molecules).
  • a microcapsule, bead, or droplet comprises a heterogeneous mixture of reagents.
  • the heterogeneous mixture of reagents can comprise all components necessary to perform a reaction.
  • such mixture can comprise all components necessary to perform a reaction, except for 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more components necessary to perform a reaction.
  • such additional components are contained within, or otherwise coupled to, a different microcapsule, droplet, or bead, or within a solution within a partition (e.g., microwell) of the system.
  • FIG. 5 schematically illustrates an example of a microwell array.
  • the array can be contained within a substrate 500.
  • the substrate 500 comprises a plurality of wells 502.
  • the wells 502 may be of any size or shape, and the spacing between the wells, the number of wells per substrate, as well as the density of the wells on the substrate 500 can be modified, depending on the particular application.
  • a sample molecule 506 which may comprise a cell or cellular components (e.g., nucleic acid molecules) is co-partitioned with a bead 504, which may comprise a nucleic acid barcode molecule coupled thereto.
  • the wells 502 may be loaded using gravity or other loading technique (e.g., centrifugation, liquid handler, acoustic loading, optoelectronic, etc.). In some instances, at least one of the wells 502 contains a single sample molecule 506 (e.g., cell) and a single bead 504.
  • gravity or other loading technique e.g., centrifugation, liquid handler, acoustic loading, optoelectronic, etc.
  • at least one of the wells 502 contains a single sample molecule 506 (e.g., cell) and a single bead 504.
  • Reagents may be loaded into a well either sequentially or concurrently.
  • reagents are introduced to the device either before or after a particular operation.
  • reagents (which may be provided, in certain instances, in microcapsules, droplets, or beads) are introduced sequentially such that different reactions or operations occur at different steps.
  • the reagents (or microcapsules, droplets, or beads) may also be loaded at operations interspersed with a reaction or operation step.
  • microcapsules comprising reagents for fragmenting polynucleotides (e.g., restriction enzymes) and/or other enzymes (e.g., transposases, ligases, polymerases, etc.) may be loaded into the well or plurality of wells, followed by loading of microcapsules, droplets, or beads comprising reagents for attaching nucleic acid barcode molecules to a sample nucleic acid molecule.
  • Reagents may be provided concurrently or sequentially with a sample, e.g., a cell or cellular components (e.g., organelles, proteins, nucleic acid molecules, carbohydrates, lipids, etc.). Accordingly, use of wells may be useful in performing multi-step operations or reactions.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules and other reagents may be contained within a microcapsule, bead, or droplet. These microcapsules, beads, or droplets may be loaded into a partition (e.g., a microwell) before, after, or concurrently with the loading of a cell, such that each cell is contacted with a different microcapsule, bead, or droplet. This technique may be used to attach a unique nucleic acid barcode molecule to nucleic acid molecules obtained from each cell. Alternatively or in addition to, the sample nucleic acid molecules may be attached to a support.
  • a partition e.g., a microwell
  • the partition (e.g., microwell) may comprise a bead which has coupled thereto a plurality of nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the sample nucleic acid molecules, or derivatives thereof, may couple or attach to the nucleic acid barcode molecules on the support.
  • the resulting barcoded nucleic acid molecules may then be removed from the partition, and in some instances, pooled and sequenced.
  • the nucleic acid barcode sequences may be used to trace the origin of the sample nucleic acid molecule. For example, polynucleotides with identical barcodes may be determined to originate from the same cell or partition, while polynucleotides with different barcodes may be determined to originate from different cells or partitions.
  • the samples or reagents may be loaded in the wells or microwells using a variety of approaches.
  • the samples e.g., a cell, cell bead, or cellular component
  • reagents as described herein
  • the samples may be loaded into the well or microwell using an external force, e.g., gravitational force, electrical force, magnetic force, or using mechanisms to drive the sample or reagents into the well, e.g., via pressure-driven flow, centrifugation, optoelectronics, acoustic loading, electrokinetic pumping, vacuum, capillary flow, etc.
  • a fluid handling system may be used to load the samples or reagents into the well.
  • the loading of the samples or reagents may follow a Poissonian distribution or a non-Poissonian distribution, e.g., super Poisson or sub- Poisson.
  • the geometry, spacing between wells, density, and size of the microwells may be modified to accommodate a useful sample or reagent distribution; for instance, the size and spacing of the microwells may be adjusted such that the sample or reagents may be distributed in a super-Poissonian fashion.
  • the microwell array or plate comprises pairs of microwells, in which each pair of microwells is configured to hold a droplet (e.g., comprising a single cell) and a single bead (such as those described herein, which may, in some instances, also be encapsulated in a droplet).
  • the droplet and the bead (or droplet containing the bead) may be loaded simultaneously or sequentially, and the droplet and the bead may be merged, e.g., upon contact of the droplet and the bead, or upon application of a stimulus (e.g., external force, agitation, heat, light, magnetic or electric force, etc.).
  • a stimulus e.g., external force, agitation, heat, light, magnetic or electric force, etc.
  • the loading of the droplet and the bead is super-Poissonian.
  • the wells are configured to hold two droplets comprising different reagents and/or samples, which are merged upon contact or upon application of a stimulus.
  • the droplet of one microwell of the pair can comprise reagents that may react with an agent in the droplet of the other microwell of the pair.
  • one droplet can comprise reagents that are configured to release the nucleic acid barcode molecules of a bead contained in another droplet, located in the adjacent microwell.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may be released from the bead into the partition (e.g., the microwell or microwell pair that are in contact), and further processing may be performed (e.g., barcoding, nucleic acid reactions, etc.).
  • the partition e.g., the microwell or microwell pair that are in contact
  • further processing e.g., barcoding, nucleic acid reactions, etc.
  • one of the droplets may comprise lysis reagents for lysing the cell upon droplet merging.
  • a droplet or microcapsule may be partitioned into a well.
  • the droplets may be selected or subjected to pre-processing prior to loading into a well.
  • the droplets may comprise cells, and only certain droplets, such as those containing a single cell (or at least one cell), may be selected for use in loading of the wells.
  • Such a pre-selection process may be useful in efficient loading of single cells, such as to obtain a non-Poissonian distribution, or to pre-filter cells for a selected characteristic prior to further partitioning in the wells.
  • the technique may be useful in obtaining or preventing cell doublet or multiplet formation prior to or during loading of the microwell.
  • the wells can comprise nucleic acid barcode molecules attached thereto.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may be attached to a surface of the well (e.g., a wall of the well).
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule (e.g., a partition barcode sequence) of one well may differ from the nucleic acid barcode molecule of another well, which can permit identification of the contents contained with a single partition or well.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule can comprise a spatial barcode sequence that can identify a spatial coordinate of a well, such as within the well array or well plate.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule can comprise a unique molecular identifier for individual molecule identification.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may be configured to attach to or capture a nucleic acid molecule within a sample or cell distributed in the well.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a capture sequence that may be used to capture or hybridize to a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., RNA, DNA) within the sample.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may be releasable from the microwell.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules may comprise a chemical cross-linker which may be cleaved upon application of a stimulus (e.g., photo-, magnetic, chemical, biological, stimulus).
  • the released nucleic acid barcode molecules which may be hybridized or configured to hybridize to a sample nucleic acid molecule, may be collected and pooled for further processing, which can include nucleic acid processing (e.g., amplification, extension, reverse transcription, etc.) and/or characterization (e.g., sequencing).
  • nucleic acid processing e.g., amplification, extension, reverse transcription, etc.
  • characterization e.g., sequencing
  • the unique partition barcode sequences may be used to identify the cell or partition from which a nucleic acid molecule originated.
  • Characterization of samples within a well may be performed. Such characterization can include, in non-limiting examples, imaging of the sample (e.g., cell, cell bead, or cellular components) or derivatives thereof. Characterization techniques such as microscopy or imaging may be useful in measuring sample profiles in fixed spatial locations.
  • imaging of each microwell and the contents contained therein may provide useful information on cell doublet formation (e.g., frequency, spatial locations, etc.), cell-bead pair efficiency, cell viability, cell size, cell morphology, expression level of a biomarker (e.g., a surface marker, a fluorescently labeled molecule therein, etc.), cell or bead loading rate, number of cell-bead pairs, etc.
  • imaging may be used to characterize live cells in the wells, including, but not limited to: dynamic live-cell tracking, cell cell interactions (when two or more cells are co-partitioned), cell proliferation, etc.
  • a well may be loaded with a sample and reagents, simultaneously or sequentially.
  • the well may be subjected to washing, e.g., to remove excess cells from the well, microwell array, or plate.
  • washing may be performed to remove excess beads or other reagents from the well, microwell array, or plate.
  • the cells may be lysed in the individual partitions to release the intracellular components or cellular analytes.
  • the cells may be fixed or permeabilized in the individual partitions.
  • the intracellular components or cellular analytes may couple to a support, e.g., on a surface of the microwell, on a solid support (e.g., bead), or they may be collected for further downstream processing. For instance, after cell lysis, the intracellular components or cellular analytes may be transferred to individual droplets or other partitions for barcoding.
  • the intracellular components or cellular analytes may couple to a bead comprising a nucleic acid barcode molecule; subsequently, the bead may be collected and further processed, e.g., subjected to nucleic acid reaction such as reverse transcription, amplification, or extension, and the nucleic acid molecules thereon may be further characterized, e.g., via sequencing.
  • the intracellular components or cellular analytes may be barcoded in the well (e.g., using a bead comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules that are releasable or on a surface of the microwell comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules).
  • the barcoded nucleic acid molecules or analytes may be further processed in the well, or the barcoded nucleic acid molecules or analytes may be collected from the individual partitions and subjected to further processing outside the partition. Further processing can include nucleic acid processing (e.g., performing an amplification, extension) or characterization (e.g., fluorescence monitoring of amplified molecules, sequencing).
  • the well or microwell array or plate
  • the well may be sealed (e.g., using an oil, membrane, wax, etc.), which enables storage of the assay or selective introduction of additional reagents.
  • FIG. 6 schematically shows an example workflow for processing nucleic acid molecules within a sample.
  • a substrate 600 comprising a plurality of microwells 602 may be provided.
  • a sample 606 which may comprise a cell, cell bead, cellular components or analytes (e.g., proteins and/or nucleic acid molecules) can be co-partitioned, in a plurality of microwells 602, with a plurality of beads 604 comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules.
  • the sample 606 may be processed within the partition.
  • the cell may be subjected to conditions sufficient to lyse the cells and release the analytes contained therein.
  • the bead 604 may be further processed.
  • processes 620a and 620b schematically illustrate different workflows, depending on the properties of the bead 604.
  • the bead comprises nucleic acid barcode molecules that are attached thereto, and sample nucleic acid molecules (e.g., RNA, DNA) may attach, e.g., via hybridization of ligation, to the nucleic acid barcode molecules. Such attachment may occur on the bead.
  • sample nucleic acid molecules e.g., RNA, DNA
  • the beads 604 from multiple wells 602 may be collected and pooled. Further processing may be performed in process 640. For example, one or more nucleic acid reactions may be performed, such as reverse transcription, nucleic acid extension, amplification, ligation, transposition, etc.
  • adapter sequences are ligated to the nucleic acid molecules, or derivatives thereof, as described elsewhere herein.
  • sequencing primer sequences may be appended to each end of the nucleic acid molecule.
  • further characterization such as sequencing may be performed to generate sequencing reads.
  • the sequencing reads may yield information on individual cells or populations of cells, which may be represented visually or graphically, e.g., in a plot 655.
  • the bead comprises nucleic acid barcode molecules that are releasably attached thereto, as described below.
  • the bead may degrade or otherwise release the nucleic acid barcode molecules into the well 602; the nucleic acid barcode molecules may then be used to barcode nucleic acid molecules within the well 602. Further processing may be performed either inside the partition or outside the partition. For example, one or more nucleic acid reactions may be performed, such as reverse transcription, nucleic acid extension, amplification, ligation, transposition, etc. In some instances, adapter sequences are ligated to the nucleic acid molecules, or derivatives thereof, as described elsewhere herein.
  • sequencing primer sequences may be appended to each end of the nucleic acid molecule.
  • further characterization such as sequencing may be performed to generate sequencing reads.
  • the sequencing reads may yield information on individual cells or populations of cells, which may be represented visually or graphically, e.g., in a plot 655.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecules may be delivered to a partition (e.g., a droplet or well) via a solid support or carrier (e.g., a bead).
  • a solid support or carrier e.g., a bead
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules are initially associated with the solid support and then released from the solid support upon application of a stimulus, which allows the nucleic acid barcode molecules to dissociate or to be released from the solid support.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules are initially associated with the solid support (e.g., bead) and then released from the solid support upon application of a biological stimulus, a chemical stimulus, a thermal stimulus, an electrical stimulus, a magnetic stimulus, and/or a photo stimulus.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule may contain a barcode sequence and a functional sequence, such as a nucleic acid primer sequence or a template switch oligonucleotide (TSO) sequence.
  • a functional sequence such as a nucleic acid primer sequence or a template switch oligonucleotide (TSO) sequence.
  • the solid support may be a bead.
  • a solid support e.g., a bead, may be porous, non- porous, hollow (e.g., a microcapsule), solid, semi-solid, and/or a combination thereof.
  • Beads may be solid, semi-solid, semi-fluidic, fluidic, and/or a combination thereof.
  • a solid support e.g., a bead
  • a solid support may be at least partially dissolvable, disruptable, and/or degradable.
  • a solid support, e.g., a bead may not be degradable.
  • the solid support e.g., a bead
  • a gel bead may be a hydrogel bead.
  • a gel bead may be formed from molecular precursors, such as a polymeric or monomeric species.
  • a semi-solid support, e.g., a bead may be a liposomal bead.
  • Solid supports, e.g., beads may comprise metals including iron oxide, gold, and silver.
  • the solid support, e.g., the bead may be a silica bead.
  • the solid support, e.g., a bead can be rigid. In other cases, the solid support, e.g., a bead, may be flexible and/or compressible.
  • a partition may comprise one or more unique identifiers, such as barcodes.
  • Barcodes may be previously, subsequently or concurrently delivered to the partitions that hold the compartmentalized or partitioned biological particle.
  • barcodes may be injected into droplets or deposited in microwells previous to, subsequent to, or concurrently with droplet generation or providing of reagents in the microwells, respectively.
  • the delivery of the barcodes to a particular partition allows for the later attribution of the characteristics of the individual biological particle to the particular partition.
  • Barcodes may be delivered, for example on a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., an oligonucleotide), to a partition via any suitable mechanism.
  • Barcoded nucleic acid molecules can be delivered to a partition via a microcapsule.
  • a microcapsule in some instances, can comprise a bead. Beads are described in further detail below.
  • barcoded nucleic acid molecules can be initially associated with the microcapsule and then released from the microcapsule. Release of the barcoded nucleic acid molecules can be passive (e.g., by diffusion out of the microcapsule). In addition or alternatively, release from the microcapsule can be upon application of a stimulus which allows the barcoded nucleic acid nucleic acid molecules to dissociate or to be released from the microcapsule. Such stimulus may disrupt the microcapsule, an interaction that couples the barcoded nucleic acid molecules to or within the microcapsule, or both.
  • Such stimulus can include, for example, a thermal stimulus, photo-stimulus, chemical stimulus (e.g., change in pH or use of a reducing agent(s)), a mechanical stimulus, a radiation stimulus; a biological stimulus (e.g., enzyme), or any combination thereof.
  • a thermal stimulus e.g., a thermal stimulus, photo-stimulus, chemical stimulus (e.g., change in pH or use of a reducing agent(s)), a mechanical stimulus, a radiation stimulus; a biological stimulus (e.g., enzyme), or any combination thereof.
  • beads, analyte carriers, and droplets may flow along channels (e.g., the channels of a microfluidic device), in some cases at substantially regular flow profiles (e.g., at regular flow rates).
  • Such regular flow profiles may permit a droplet to include a single bead and a single biological particle.
  • Such regular flow profiles may permit the droplets to have an occupancy (e.g., droplets having beads and biological particles) greater than 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or 95%.
  • occupancy e.g., droplets having beads and biological particles
  • a bead may be porous, non-porous, solid, semi-solid, semi-fluidic, fluidic, and/or a combination thereof.
  • a bead may be dissolvable, disruptable, and/or degradable.
  • a bead may not be degradable.
  • the bead may be a gel bead.
  • a gel bead may be a hydrogel bead.
  • a gel bead may be formed from molecular precursors, such as a polymeric or monomeric species.
  • a semi-solid bead may be a liposomal bead.
  • Solid beads may comprise metals including iron oxide, gold, and silver.
  • the bead may be a silica bead.
  • the bead can be rigid. In other cases, the bead may be flexible and/or compressible.
  • a bead may be of any suitable shape.
  • bead shapes include, but are not limited to, spherical, non-spherical, oval, oblong, amorphous, circular, cylindrical, and variations thereof.
  • Beads may be of uniform size or heterogeneous size.
  • the diameter of a bead may be at least about 10 nanometers (nm), 100 nm, 500 nm, 1 micrometer (pm), 5pm, 10pm, 20pm, 30pm, 40pm, 50pm, 60pm, 70pm, 80pm, 90pm, 100pm, 250pm, 500pm, 1mm, or greater.
  • a bead may have a diameter of less than about 10 nm, 100 nm, 500 nm, 1pm, 5pm, 10pm, 20pm, 30pm, 40pm, 50pm, 60pm, 70pm, 80pm, 90pm, 100pm, 250pm, 500pm, 1mm, or less.
  • a bead may have a diameter in the range of about 40- 75pm, 30-75pm, 20-75pm, 40-85pm, 40-95pm, 20-100pm, 10-100pm, 1-lOOpm, 20-250pm, or 20-500pm.
  • beads can be provided as a population or plurality of beads having a relatively monodisperse size distribution. Where it may be desirable to provide relatively consistent amounts of reagents within partitions, maintaining relatively consistent bead characteristics, such as size, can contribute to the overall consistency.
  • the beads described herein may have size distributions that have a coefficient of variation in their cross- sectional dimensions of less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, and in some cases less than 15%, less than 10%, less than 5%, or less.
  • a bead may comprise natural and/or synthetic materials.
  • a bead can comprise a natural polymer, a synthetic polymer or both natural and synthetic polymers.
  • natural polymers include proteins and sugars such as deoxyribonucleic acid, rubber, cellulose, starch (e.g., amylose, amylopectin), proteins, enzymes, polysaccharides, silks, polyhydroxyalkanoates, chitosan, dextran, collagen, carrageenan, ispaghula, acacia, agar, gelatin, shellac, sterculia gum, xanthan gum, Corn sugar gum, guar gum, gum karaya, agarose, alginic acid, alginate, or natural polymers thereof.
  • proteins and sugars such as deoxyribonucleic acid, rubber, cellulose, starch (e.g., amylose, amylopectin), proteins, enzymes, polysaccharides, silks, polyhydroxyalkano
  • Examples of synthetic polymers include acrylics, nylons, silicones, spandex, viscose rayon, polycarboxylic acids, polyvinyl acetate, polyacrylamide, polyacrylate, polyethylene glycol, polyurethanes, polylactic acid, silica, polystyrene, polyacrylonitrile, polybutadiene, polycarbonate, polyethylene, polyethylene terephthalate, poly(chlorotrifluoroethylene), polyethylene oxide), poly(ethylene terephthalate), polyethylene, polyisobutylene, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(oxymethylene), polyformaldehyde, polypropylene, polystyrene, poly(tetrafluoroethylene), poly(vinyl acetate), poly(vinyl alcohol), poly(vinyl chloride), poly(vinylidene dichloride), poly(vinylidene difluoride), poly(vinyl fluoride) and/or combinations (e.g., co-polymers) thereof.
  • the bead may contain molecular precursors (e.g., monomers or polymers), which may form a polymer network via polymerization of the molecular precursors.
  • a precursor may be an already polymerized species capable of undergoing further polymerization via, for example, a chemical cross-linkage.
  • a precursor can comprise one or more of an acrylamide or a methacrylamide monomer, oligomer, or polymer.
  • the bead may comprise prepolymers, which are oligomers capable of further polymerization.
  • polyurethane beads may be prepared using prepolymers.
  • the bead may contain individual polymers that may be further polymerized together.
  • beads may be generated via polymerization of different precursors, such that they comprise mixed polymers, co-polymers, and/or block co-polymers.
  • the bead may comprise covalent or ionic bonds between polymeric precursors (e.g., monomers, oligomers, linear polymers), nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides), primers, and other entities.
  • the covalent bonds can be carbon-carbon bonds, thioether bonds, or carbon- heteroatom bonds.
  • Cross-linking may be permanent or reversible, depending upon the particular cross linker used. Reversible cross-linking may allow for the polymer to linearize or dissociate under appropriate conditions. In some cases, reversible cross-linking may also allow for reversible attachment of a material bound to the surface of a bead. In some cases, a cross-linker may form disulfide linkages. In some cases, the chemical cross-linker forming disulfide linkages may be cystamine or a modified cystamine.
  • disulfide linkages can be formed between molecular precursor units (e.g., monomers, oligomers, or linear polymers) or precursors incorporated into a bead and nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides).
  • Cystamine is an organic agent comprising a disulfide bond that may be used as a crosslinker agent between individual monomeric or polymeric precursors of a bead.
  • Polyacrylamide may be polymerized in the presence of cystamine or a species comprising cystamine (e.g., a modified cystamine) to generate polyacrylamide gel beads comprising disulfide linkages (e.g., chemically degradable beads comprising chemically-reducible cross-linkers).
  • the disulfide linkages may permit the bead to be degraded (or dissolved) upon exposure of the bead to a reducing agent.
  • chitosan a linear polysaccharide polymer
  • Crosslinking of chitosan polymers may be achieved by chemical reactions that are initiated by heat, pressure, change in pH, and/or radiation.
  • a bead may comprise an acrydite moiety, which in certain aspects may be used to attach one or more nucleic acid molecules (e.g., barcode sequence, barcoded nucleic acid molecule, barcoded oligonucleotide, primer, or other oligonucleotide) to the bead.
  • an acrydite moiety can refer to an acrydite analogue generated from the reaction of acrydite with one or more species, such as, the reaction of acrydite with other monomers and cross-linkers during a polymerization reaction.
  • Acrydite moieties may be modified to form chemical bonds with a species to be attached, such as a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., barcode sequence, barcoded nucleic acid molecule, barcoded oligonucleotide, primer, or other oligonucleotide).
  • Acrydite moieties may be modified with thiol groups capable of forming a disulfide bond or may be modified with groups already comprising a disulfide bond. The thiol or disulfide (via disulfide exchange) may be used as an anchor point for a species to be attached or another part of the acrydite moiety may be used for attachment.
  • attachment can be reversible, such that when the disulfide bond is broken (e.g., in the presence of a reducing agent), the attached species is released from the bead.
  • an acrydite moiety can comprise a reactive hydroxyl group that may be used for attachment.
  • nucleic acid molecules e.g., oligonucleotides
  • Functionalization of beads for attachment of nucleic acid molecules may be achieved through a wide range of different approaches, including activation of chemical groups within a polymer, incorporation of active or activatable functional groups in the polymer structure, or attachment at the pre-polymer or monomer stage in bead production.
  • precursors e.g., monomers, cross-linkers
  • precursors that are polymerized to form a bead may comprise acrydite moieties, such that when a bead is generated, the bead also comprises acrydite moieties.
  • the acrydite moieties can be attached to a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., oligonucleotide) that comprises one or more functional sequences, such as a TSO sequence or a primer sequence (e.g., a poly T sequence, or a nucleic acid primer sequence complementary to a target nucleic acid sequence and/or for amplifying a target nucleic acid sequence, a random primer, primer sequence for messenger RNA) and/or one or more barcode sequences.
  • the one more barcode sequences may include sequences that are the same for all nucleic acid molecules coupled to a bead and/or sequences that are different across all nucleic acid molecules coupled to the bead.
  • the nucleic acid molecule may be incorporated into the bead.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can comprise a functional sequence, for example, for attachment to a sequencing flow cell, such as, for example, a P5 sequence (or a portion thereof) for Illumina® sequencing.
  • the nucleic acid molecule or derivative thereof e.g., oligonucleotide or polynucleotide generated from the nucleic acid molecule
  • can comprise another functional sequence such as, for example, a P7 sequence (or a portion thereof) for attachment to a sequencing flow cell for Illumina sequencing.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can comprise a barcode sequence.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can further comprise a unique molecular identifier (UMI).
  • UMI unique molecular identifier
  • the nucleic acid molecule can comprise an R1 primer sequence for Illumina sequencing. In some cases, the nucleic acid molecule can comprise an R2 primer sequence for Illumina sequencing. Examples of such nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides, polynucleotides, etc.) and uses thereof, as may be used with compositions, devices, methods and systems of the present disclosure, are provided in U.S. Patent Pub. Nos. 2014/0378345 and 2015/0376609, each of which is entirely incorporated herein by reference. [00413] In some cases, the nucleic acid molecule can comprise one or more functional sequences.
  • a functional sequence can comprise a sequence for attachment to a sequencing flow cell, such as, for example, a P5 sequence for Illumina® sequencing.
  • the nucleic acid molecule or derivative thereof e.g., oligonucleotide or polynucleotide generated from the nucleic acid molecule
  • the functional sequence can comprise a barcode sequence or multiple barcode sequences.
  • the functional sequence can comprise a unique molecular identifier (UMI).
  • UMI unique molecular identifier
  • the functional sequence can comprise a primer sequence (e.g., an R1 primer sequence for Illumina sequencing, an R2 primer sequence for Illumina sequencing, etc.).
  • a functional sequence can comprise a partial sequence, such as a partial barcode sequence, partial anchoring sequence, partial sequencing primer sequence (e.g., partial R1 sequence, partial R2 sequence, etc.), a partial sequence configured to attach to the flow cell of a sequencer (e.g., partial P5 sequence, partial P7 sequence, etc.), or a partial sequence of any other type of sequence described elsewhere herein.
  • a partial sequence may contain a contiguous or continuous portion or segment, but not all, of a full sequence, for example.
  • a downstream procedure may extend the partial sequence, or derivative thereof, to achieve a full sequence of the partial sequence, or derivative thereof.
  • nucleic acid molecules e.g., oligonucleotides, polynucleotides, etc.
  • uses thereof as may be used with compositions, devices, methods and systems of the present disclosure, are provided in U.S. Patent Pub. Nos. 2014/0378345 and 2015/0376609, each of which is entirely incorporated herein by reference.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of a barcode carrying bead.
  • a nucleic acid molecule 302 such as an oligonucleotide, can be coupled to a bead 304 by a releasable linkage 306, such as, for example, a disulfide linker.
  • the same bead 304 may be coupled (e.g., via releasable linkage) to one or more other nucleic acid molecules 318, 320.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may be or comprise a barcode. As noted elsewhere herein, the structure of the barcode may comprise a number of sequence elements.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may comprise a functional sequence 308 that may be used in subsequent processing.
  • the functional sequence 308 may include one or more of a sequencer specific flow cell attachment sequence (e.g., a P5 sequence for Illumina® sequencing systems) and a sequencing primer sequence (e.g., a R1 primer for Illumina® sequencing systems), or partial sequence(s) thereof.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may comprise a barcode sequence 310 for use in barcoding the sample (e.g., DNA, RNA, protein, etc.).
  • the barcode sequence 310 can be bead-specific such that the barcode sequence 310 is common to all nucleic acid molecules (e.g., including nucleic acid molecule 302) coupled to the same bead 304.
  • the barcode sequence 310 can be partition-specific such that the barcode sequence 310 is common to all nucleic acid molecules coupled to one or more beads that are partitioned into the same partition.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may comprise a specific priming sequence 312, such as an mRNA specific priming sequence (e.g., poly-T sequence), a targeted priming sequence, and/or a random priming sequence.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may comprise an anchoring sequence 314 to ensure that the specific priming sequence 312 hybridizes at the sequence end (e.g., of the mRNA).
  • the anchoring sequence 314 can include a random short sequence of nucleotides, such as a 1-mer, 2-mer, 3-mer or longer sequence, which can ensure that a poly-T segment is more likely to hybridize at the sequence end of the poly-A tail of the mRNA.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 may comprise a unique molecular identifying sequence 316 (e.g., unique molecular identifier (UMI)).
  • the unique molecular identifying sequence 316 may comprise from about 5 to about 8 nucleotides.
  • the unique molecular identifying sequence 316 may compress less than about 5 or more than about 8 nucleotides.
  • the unique molecular identifying sequence 316 may be a unique sequence that varies across individual nucleic acid molecules (e.g., 302, 318, 320, etc.) coupled to a single bead (e.g., bead 304).
  • the unique molecular identifying sequence 316 may be a random sequence (e.g., such as a random N-mer sequence).
  • the UMI may provide a unique identifier of the starting mRNA molecule that was captured, in order to allow quantitation of the number of original expressed RNA.
  • FIG. 3 shows three nucleic acid molecules 302, 318, 320 coupled to the surface of the bead 304, an individual bead may be coupled to any number of individual nucleic acid molecules, for example, from one to tens to hundreds of thousands or even millions of individual nucleic acid molecules.
  • the respective barcodes for the individual nucleic acid molecules can comprise both common sequence segments or relatively common sequence segments (e.g., 308, 310, 312, etc.) and variable or unique sequence segments (e.g., 316) between different individual nucleic acid molecules coupled to the same bead.
  • a biological particle e.g., cell, DNA, RNA, etc.
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecules 302, 318, 320 can be released from the bead 304 in the partition.
  • the poly-T segment e.g., 312
  • one of the released nucleic acid molecules e.g., 302
  • Reverse transcription may result in a cDNA transcript of the mRNA, but which transcript includes each of the sequence segments 308, 310, 316 of the nucleic acid molecule 302.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 302 comprises an anchoring sequence 3144
  • all of the cDNA transcripts of the individual mRNA molecules may include a common barcode sequence segment 310.
  • the transcripts made from the different mRNA molecules within a given partition may vary at the unique molecular identifying sequence 312 segment (e.g., UMI segment).
  • UMI segment unique molecular identifying sequence
  • the number of different UMIs can be indicative of the quantity of mRNA originating from a given partition, and thus from the biological particle (e.g., cell).
  • the transcripts can be amplified, cleaned up and sequenced to identify the sequence of the cDNA transcript of the mRNA, as well as to sequence the barcode segment and the UMI segment. While a poly-T primer sequence is described, other targeted or random priming sequences may also be used in priming the reverse transcription reaction. Likewise, although described as releasing the barcoded oligonucleotides into the partition, in some cases, the nucleic acid molecules bound to the bead (e.g., gel bead) may be used to hybridize and capture the mRNA on the solid phase of the bead, for example, in order to facilitate the separation of the RNA from other cell contents.
  • the nucleic acid molecules bound to the bead e.g., gel bead
  • the nucleic acid molecules bound to the bead may be used to hybridize and capture the mRNA on the solid phase of the bead, for example, in order to facilitate the separation of the RNA from other cell contents.
  • RNA molecules on the beads may be subjected to reverse transcription or other nucleic acid processing, additional adapter sequences may be added to the barcoded nucleic acid molecules, or other nucleic acid reactions (e.g., amplification, nucleic acid extension) may be performed.
  • the beads or products thereof e.g., barcoded nucleic acid molecules
  • the beads comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules may be introduced into a partition (e.g., well or droplet) prior to, during, or following introduction of a sample into the partition.
  • the nucleic acid molecules of a sample may be subjected to barcoding, which may occur on the bead (in cases where the nucleic acid molecules remain coupled to the bead) or following release of the nucleic acid barcode molecules into the partition.
  • the beads from various partitions may be collected, pooled, and subjected to further processing (e.g., reverse transcription, adapter attachment, amplification, clean up, sequencing).
  • the processing may occur in the partition.
  • conditions sufficient for barcoding, adapter attachment, reverse transcription, or other nucleic acid processing operations may be provided in the partition and performed prior to clean up and sequencing.
  • a bead may comprise a capture sequence or binding sequence configured to bind to a corresponding capture sequence or binding sequence.
  • a bead may comprise a plurality of different capture sequences or binding sequences configured to bind to different respective corresponding capture sequences or binding sequences.
  • a bead may comprise a first subset of one or more capture sequences each configured to bind to a first corresponding capture sequence, a second subset of one or more capture sequences each configured to bind to a second corresponding capture sequence, a third subset of one or more capture sequences each configured to bind to a third corresponding capture sequence, and etc.
  • a bead may comprise any number of different capture sequences.
  • a bead may comprise at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more different capture sequences or binding sequences configured to bind to different respective capture sequences or binding sequences, respectively.
  • a bead may comprise at most about 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 different capture sequences or binding sequences configured to bind to different respective capture sequences or binding sequences.
  • the different capture sequences or binding sequences may be configured to facilitate analysis of a same type of analyte.
  • the different capture sequences or binding sequences may be configured to facilitate analysis of different types of analytes (with the same bead).
  • the capture sequence may be designed to attach to a corresponding capture sequence.
  • such corresponding capture sequence may be introduced to, or otherwise induced in, a biological particle (e.g., cell, cell bead, etc.) for performing different assays in various formats (e.g., barcoded antibodies comprising the corresponding capture sequence, barcoded MHC dextramers comprising the corresponding capture sequence, barcoded guide RNA molecules comprising the corresponding capture sequence, etc.), such that the corresponding capture sequence may later interact with the capture sequence associated with the bead.
  • a biological particle e.g., cell, cell bead, etc.
  • a biological particle e.g., cell, cell bead, etc.
  • formats e.g., barcoded antibodies comprising the corresponding capture sequence, barcoded MHC dextramers comprising the corresponding capture sequence, barcoded guide RNA molecules comprising the corresponding capture sequence, etc.
  • a capture sequence coupled to a bead may be configured to attach to a linker molecule, such as a splint molecule, wherein the linker molecule is configured to couple the bead (or other support) to other molecules through the linker molecule, such as to one or more analytes or one or more other linker molecules.
  • a linker molecule such as a splint molecule
  • FIG. 4 illustrates another example of a barcode carrying bead.
  • a nucleic acid molecule 405, such as an oligonucleotide, can be coupled to a bead 404 by a releasable linkage 406, such as, for example, a disulfide linker.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 405 may comprise a first capture sequence 460.
  • the same bead 404 may be coupled (e.g., via releasable linkage) to one or more other nucleic acid molecules 403, 407 comprising other capture sequences.
  • the nucleic acid molecule 405 may be or comprise a barcode.
  • the structure of the barcode may comprise a number of sequence elements, such as a functional sequence 408 (e.g., flow cell attachment sequence, sequencing primer sequence, etc.), a barcode sequence 410 (e.g., bead-specific sequence common to bead, partition-specific sequence common to partition, etc.), and a unique molecular identifier 412 (e.g., unique sequence within different molecules attached to the bead), or partial sequences thereof.
  • the capture sequence 460 may be configured to attach to a corresponding capture sequence 465.
  • the corresponding capture sequence 465 may be coupled to another molecule that may be an analyte or an intermediary carrier. For example, as illustrated in FIG.
  • the corresponding capture sequence 465 is coupled to a guide RNA molecule 462 comprising a target sequence 464, wherein the target sequence 464 is configured to attach to the analyte.
  • Another oligonucleotide molecule 407 attached to the bead 404 comprises a second capture sequence 480 which is configured to attach to a second corresponding capture sequence 485.
  • the second corresponding capture sequence 485 is coupled to an antibody 482.
  • the antibody 482 may have binding specificity to an analyte (e.g., surface protein). Alternatively, the antibody 482 may not have binding specificity.
  • Another oligonucleotide molecule 403 attached to the bead 404 comprises a third capture sequence 470 which is configured to attach to a second corresponding capture sequence 475. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the third corresponding capture sequence 475 is coupled to a molecule 472.
  • the molecule 472 may or may not be configured to target an analyte.
  • the bead 407 may comprise the other sequences (e.g., functional sequence, barcode sequence, UMI, etc.) described with respect to oligonucleotide molecule 405. While a single oligonucleotide molecule comprising each capture sequence is illustrated in 4, it will be appreciated that, for each capture sequence, the bead may comprise a set of one or more oligonucleotide molecules each comprising the capture sequence. For example, the bead may comprise any number of sets of one or more different capture sequences. Alternatively or in addition, the bead 404 may comprise other capture sequences. Alternatively or in addition, the bead 404 may comprise fewer types of capture sequences (e.g., two capture sequences).
  • the bead 404 may comprise fewer types of capture sequences (e.g., two capture sequences).
  • the bead 404 may comprise oligonucleotide molecule(s) comprising a priming sequence, such as a specific priming sequence such as an mRNA specific priming sequence (e.g., poly-T sequence), a targeted priming sequence, and/or a random priming sequence, for example, to facilitate an assay for gene expression.
  • a priming sequence such as a specific priming sequence such as an mRNA specific priming sequence (e.g., poly-T sequence), a targeted priming sequence, and/or a random priming sequence, for example, to facilitate an assay for gene expression.
  • a priming sequence such as a specific priming sequence such as an mRNA specific priming sequence (e.g., poly-T sequence)
  • a targeted priming sequence e.g., a targeted priming sequence
  • a random priming sequence for example, to facilitate an assay for gene expression.
  • the barcoded oligonucleotides may be released (e.g., in a
  • the nucleic acid molecules bound to the bead may be used to hybridize and capture analytes (e.g., one or more types of analytes) on the solid phase of the bead.
  • analytes e.g., one or more types of analytes
  • precursors comprising a functional group that is reactive or capable of being activated such that it becomes reactive can be polymerized with other precursors to generate gel beads comprising the activated or activatable functional group.
  • the functional group may then be used to attach additional species (e.g., disulfide linkers, primers, other oligonucleotides, etc.) to the gel beads.
  • additional species e.g., disulfide linkers, primers, other oligonucleotides, etc.
  • some precursors comprising a carboxylic acid (COOH) group can co-polymerize with other precursors to form a gel bead that also comprises a COOH functional group.
  • acrylic acid a species comprising free COOH groups
  • acrylamide acrylamide
  • bis(acryloyl)cystamine can be co-polymerized together to generate a gel bead comprising free COOH groups.
  • the COOH groups of the gel bead can be activated (e.g., via l-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC) and N- Hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) or 4-(4,6-Dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride (DMTMM)) such that they are reactive (e.g., reactive to amine functional groups where EDC/NHS or DMTMM are used for activation).
  • EDC l-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide
  • NHS N- Hydroxysuccinimide
  • DTMM 4-(4,6-Dimethoxy-
  • the activated COOH groups can then react with an appropriate species (e.g., a species comprising an amine functional group where the carboxylic acid groups are activated to be reactive with an amine functional group) comprising a moiety to be linked to the bead.
  • an appropriate species e.g., a species comprising an amine functional group where the carboxylic acid groups are activated to be reactive with an amine functional group
  • Beads comprising disulfide linkages in their polymeric network may be functionalized with additional species via reduction of some of the disulfide linkages to free thiols.
  • the disulfide linkages may be reduced via, for example, the action of a reducing agent (e.g., DTT, TCEP, etc.) to generate free thiol groups, without dissolution of the bead.
  • Free thiols of the beads can then react with free thiols of a species or a species comprising another disulfide bond (e.g., via thiol-disulfide exchange) such that the species can be linked to the beads (e.g., via a generated disulfide bond).
  • free thiols of the beads may react with any other suitable group.
  • free thiols of the beads may react with species comprising an acrydite moiety.
  • the free thiol groups of the beads can react with the acrydite via Michael addition chemistry, such that the species comprising the acrydite is linked to the bead.
  • uncontrolled reactions can be prevented by inclusion of a thiol capping agent such as N- ethylmalieamide or iodoacetate.
  • Activation of disulfide linkages within a bead can be controlled such that only a small number of disulfide linkages are activated. Control may be exerted, for example, by controlling the concentration of a reducing agent used to generate free thiol groups and/or concentration of reagents used to form disulfide bonds in bead polymerization.
  • a low concentration e.g., molecules of reducing agen gel bead ratios of less than or equal to about 1:100,000,000,000, less than or equal to about 1:10,000,000,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 1,000,000,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 100,000,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 10,000,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 1,000,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 100,000, less than or equal to about 1 : 10,000
  • Controlling the number of disulfide linkages that are reduced to free thiols may be useful in ensuring bead structural integrity during functionalization.
  • optically-active agents such as fluorescent dyes may be coupled to beads via free thiol groups of the beads and used to quantify the number of free thiols present in a bead and/or track a bead.
  • addition of moieties to a gel bead after gel bead formation may be advantageous.
  • addition of an oligonucleotide (e.g., barcoded oligonucleotide) after gel bead formation may avoid loss of the species during chain transfer termination that can occur during polymerization.
  • smaller precursors e.g., monomers or cross linkers that do not comprise side chain groups and linked moieties
  • functionalization after gel bead synthesis can minimize exposure of species (e.g., oligonucleotides) to be loaded with potentially damaging agents (e.g., free radicals) and/or chemical environments.
  • the generated gel may possess an upper critical solution temperature (UCST) that can permit temperature driven swelling and collapse of a bead.
  • UCT upper critical solution temperature
  • Such functionality may aid in oligonucleotide (e.g., a primer) infiltration into the bead during subsequent functionalization of the bead with the oligonucleotide.
  • Post-production functionalization may also be useful in controlling loading ratios of species in beads, such that, for example, the variability in loading ratio is minimized.
  • Species loading may also be performed in a batch process such that a plurality of beads can be functionalized with the species in a single batch.
  • a bead injected or otherwise introduced into a partition may comprise releasably, cleavably, or reversibly attached barcodes.
  • a bead injected or otherwise introduced into a partition may comprise activatable barcodes.
  • a bead injected or otherwise introduced into a partition may be degradable, disruptable, or dissolvable beads.
  • Barcodes can be releasably, cleavably or reversibly attached to the beads such that barcodes can be released or be releasable through cleavage of a linkage between the barcode molecule and the bead, or released through degradation of the underlying bead itself, allowing the barcodes to be accessed or be accessible by other reagents, or both.
  • cleavage may be achieved through reduction of di-sulfide bonds, use of restriction enzymes, photo-activated cleavage, or cleavage via other types of stimuli (e.g., chemical, thermal, pH, enzymatic, etc.) and/or reactions, such as described elsewhere herein.
  • Releasable barcodes may sometimes be referred to as being activatable, in that they are available for reaction once released.
  • an activatable barcode may be activated by releasing the barcode from a bead (or other suitable type of partition described herein).
  • Other activatable configurations are also envisioned in the context of the described methods and systems.
  • the beads may be degradable, disruptable, or dissolvable spontaneously or upon exposure to one or more stimuli (e.g., temperature changes, pH changes, exposure to particular chemical species or phase, exposure to light, reducing agent, etc.).
  • a bead may be dissolvable, such that material components of the beads are solubilized when exposed to a particular chemical species or an environmental change, such as a change temperature or a change in pH.
  • a gel bead can be degraded or dissolved at elevated temperature and/or in basic conditions.
  • a bead may be thermally degradable such that when the bead is exposed to an appropriate change in temperature (e.g., heat), the bead degrades.
  • Degradation or dissolution of a bead bound to a species e.g., a nucleic acid molecule, e.g., barcoded oligonucleotide
  • a species e.g., a nucleic acid molecule, e.g., barcoded oligonucleotide
  • the degradation of a bead may refer to the disassociation of a bound or entrained species from a bead, both with and without structurally degrading the physical bead itself.
  • the degradation of the bead may involve cleavage of a cleavable linkage via one or more species and/or methods described elsewhere herein.
  • entrained species may be released from beads through osmotic pressure differences due to, for example, changing chemical environments.
  • alteration of bead pore sizes due to osmotic pressure differences can generally occur without structural degradation of the bead itself.
  • an increase in pore size due to osmotic swelling of a bead can permit the release of entrained species within the bead.
  • osmotic shrinking of a bead may cause a bead to better retain an entrained species due to pore size contraction.
  • a degradable bead may be introduced into a partition, such as a droplet of an emulsion or a well, such that the bead degrades within the partition and any associated species (e.g., oligonucleotides) are released within the droplet when the appropriate stimulus is applied.
  • the free species e.g., oligonucleotides, nucleic acid molecules
  • a polyacrylamide bead comprising cystamine and linked, via a disulfide bond, to a barcode sequence, may be combined with a reducing agent within a droplet of a water-in-oil emulsion.
  • the reducing agent can break the various disulfide bonds, resulting in bead degradation and release of the barcode sequence into the aqueous, inner environment of the droplet.
  • heating of a droplet comprising a bead-bound barcode sequence in basic solution may also result in bead degradation and release of the attached barcode sequence into the aqueous, inner environment of the droplet.
  • any suitable number of molecular tag molecules can be associated with a bead such that, upon release from the bead, the molecular tag molecules (e.g., primer, e.g., barcoded oligonucleotide) are present in the partition at a pre-defmed concentration.
  • the pre-defmed concentration may be selected to facilitate certain reactions for generating a sequencing library, e.g., amplification, within the partition.
  • the pre-defmed concentration of the primer can be limited by the process of producing nucleic acid molecule (e.g., oligonucleotide) bearing beads.
  • beads can be non-covalently loaded with one or more reagents.
  • the beads can be non-covalently loaded by, for instance, subjecting the beads to conditions sufficient to swell the beads, allowing sufficient time for the reagents to diffuse into the interiors of the beads, and subjecting the beads to conditions sufficient to de-swell the beads.
  • the swelling of the beads may be accomplished, for instance, by placing the beads in a thermodynamically favorable solvent, subjecting the beads to a higher or lower temperature, subjecting the beads to a higher or lower ion concentration, and/or subjecting the beads to an electric field.
  • the swelling of the beads may be accomplished by various swelling methods.
  • the de-swelling of the beads may be accomplished, for instance, by transferring the beads in a thermodynamically unfavorable solvent, subjecting the beads to lower or high temperatures, subjecting the beads to a lower or higher ion concentration, and/or removing an electric field.
  • the de-swelling of the beads may be accomplished by various de-swelling methods. Transferring the beads may cause pores in the bead to shrink. The shrinking may then hinder reagents within the beads from diffusing out of the interiors of the beads. The hindrance may be due to steric interactions between the reagents and the interiors of the beads. The transfer may be accomplished microfluidically.
  • the transfer may be achieved by moving the beads from one co- flowing solvent stream to a different co-flowing solvent stream.
  • the swellability and/or pore size of the beads may be adjusted by changing the polymer composition of the bead.
  • an acrydite moiety linked to a precursor, another species linked to a precursor, or a precursor itself can comprise a labile bond, such as chemically, thermally, or photo-sensitive bond e.g., disulfide bond, UV sensitive bond, or the like.
  • acrydite moieties or other moieties comprising a labile bond are incorporated into a bead, the bead may also comprise the labile bond.
  • the labile bond may be, for example, useful in reversibly linking (e.g., covalently linking) species (e.g., barcodes, primers, etc.) to a bead.
  • a thermally labile bond may include a nucleic acid hybridization based attachment, e.g., where an oligonucleotide is hybridized to a complementary sequence that is attached to the bead, such that thermal melting of the hybrid releases the oligonucleotide, e.g., a barcode containing sequence, from the bead or microcapsule.
  • labile bonds may result in the generation of a bead capable of responding to varied stimuli.
  • Each type of labile bond may be sensitive to an associated stimulus (e.g., chemical stimulus, light, temperature, enzymatic, etc.) such that release of species attached to a bead via each labile bond may be controlled by the application of the appropriate stimulus.
  • an associated stimulus e.g., chemical stimulus, light, temperature, enzymatic, etc.
  • Such functionality may be useful in controlled release of species from a gel bead.
  • another species comprising a labile bond may be linked to a gel bead after gel bead formation via, for example, an activated functional group of the gel bead as described above.
  • barcodes that are releasably, cleavably or reversibly attached to the beads described herein include barcodes that are released or releasable through cleavage of a linkage between the barcode molecule and the bead, or that are released through degradation of the underlying bead itself, allowing the barcodes to be accessed or accessible by other reagents, or both.
  • a species e.g., oligonucleotide molecules comprising barcodes
  • a solid support e.g., a bead
  • the U-excising element may comprise a single-stranded DNA (ssDNA) sequence that contains at least one uracil.
  • the species may be attached to a solid support via the ssDNA sequence containing the at least one uracil.
  • the species may be released by a combination of uracil-DNA glycosylase (e.g., to remove the uracil) and an endonuclease (e.g., to induce an ssDNA break). If the endonuclease generates a 5’ phosphate group from the cleavage, then additional enzyme treatment may be included in downstream processing to eliminate the phosphate group, e.g., prior to ligation of additional sequencing handle elements, e.g., Illumina full P5 sequence, partial P5 sequence, full R1 sequence, and/or partial R1 sequence.
  • additional enzyme treatment may be included in downstream processing to eliminate the phosphate group, e.g., prior to ligation of additional sequencing handle elements, e.g., Illumina full P5 sequence, partial P5 sequence, full R1 sequence, and/or partial R1 sequence.
  • the barcodes that are releasable as described herein may sometimes be referred to as being activatable, in that they are available for reaction once released.
  • an activatable barcode may be activated by releasing the barcode from a bead (or other suitable type of partition described herein).
  • Other activatable configurations are also envisioned in the context of the described methods and systems.
  • labile bonds that may be coupled to a precursor or bead include an ester linkage (e.g., cleavable with an acid, a base, or hydroxylamine), a vicinal diol linkage (e.g., cleavable via sodium periodate), a Diels- Alder linkage (e.g., cleavable via heat), a sulfone linkage (e.g., cleavable via a base), a silyl ether linkage (e.g., cleavable via an acid), a glycosidic linkage (e.g., cleavable via an amylase), a peptide linkage (e.g., cleavable via a protease), or a phosphodiester linkage (e.g., cleavable via a nucle
  • ester linkage e.g., cleavable with an acid, a base, or hydroxylamine
  • Species may be encapsulated in beads during bead generation (e.g., during polymerization of precursors). Such species may or may not participate in polymerization. Such species may be entered into polymerization reaction mixtures such that generated beads comprise the species upon bead formation. In some cases, such species may be added to the gel beads after formation.
  • Such species may include, for example, nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides), reagents for a nucleic acid amplification reaction (e.g., primers, polymerases, dNTPs, co-factors (e.g., ionic co-factors), buffers) including those described herein, reagents for enzymatic reactions (e.g., enzymes, co-factors, substrates, buffers), reagents for nucleic acid modification reactions such as polymerization, ligation, or digestion, and/or reagents for template preparation (e.g., tagmentation) for one or more sequencing platforms (e.g., Nextera® for Illumina®).
  • nucleic acid molecules e.g., oligonucleotides
  • reagents for a nucleic acid amplification reaction e.g., primers, polymerases, dNTPs, co-factors (e.g., i
  • Such species may include one or more enzymes described herein, including without limitation, polymerase, reverse transcriptase, restriction enzymes (e.g., endonuclease), transposase, ligase, proteinase K, DNAse, etc.
  • Such species may include one or more reagents described elsewhere herein (e.g., lysis agents, inhibitors, inactivating agents, chelating agents, stimulus). Trapping of such species may be controlled by the polymer network density generated during polymerization of precursors, control of ionic charge within the gel bead (e.g., via ionic species linked to polymerized species), or by the release of other species.
  • Encapsulated species may be released from a bead upon bead degradation and/or by application of a stimulus capable of releasing the species from the bead.
  • species may be partitioned in a partition (e.g., droplet) during or subsequent to partition formation.
  • a partition e.g., droplet
  • Such species may include, without limitation, the abovementioned species that may also be encapsulated in a bead.
  • a degradable bead may comprise one or more species with a labile bond such that, when the bead/species is exposed to the appropriate stimuli, the bond is broken and the bead degrades.
  • the labile bond may be a chemical bond (e.g., covalent bond, ionic bond) or may be another type of physical interaction (e.g., van der Waals interactions, dipole-dipole interactions, etc.).
  • a crosslinker used to generate a bead may comprise a labile bond. Upon exposure to the appropriate conditions, the labile bond can be broken and the bead degraded.
  • a degradable bead may be useful in more quickly releasing an attached species (e.g., a nucleic acid molecule, a barcode sequence, a primer, etc.) from the bead when the appropriate stimulus is applied to the bead as compared to a bead that does not degrade.
  • an attached species e.g., a nucleic acid molecule, a barcode sequence, a primer, etc.
  • the species may have greater mobility and accessibility to other species in solution upon degradation of the bead.
  • a species may also be attached to a degradable bead via a degradable linker (e.g., disulfide linker).
  • the degradable linker may respond to the same stimuli as the degradable bead or the two degradable species may respond to different stimuli.
  • a barcode sequence may be attached, via a disulfide bond, to a polyacrylamide bead comprising cystamine. Upon exposure of the barcoded-bead to a reducing agent, the bead degrades and the barcode sequence is released upon breakage of both the disulfide linkage between the barcode sequence and the bead and the disulfide linkages of the cystamine in the bead.
  • degradation may refer to the disassociation of a bound or entrained species from a bead, both with and without structurally degrading the physical bead itself.
  • entrained species may be released from beads through osmotic pressure differences due to, for example, changing chemical environments.
  • alteration of bead pore sizes due to osmotic pressure differences can generally occur without structural degradation of the bead itself.
  • an increase in pore size due to osmotic swelling of a bead can permit the release of entrained species within the bead.
  • osmotic shrinking of a bead may cause a bead to better retain an entrained species due to pore size contraction.
  • degradable beads are provided, it may be beneficial to avoid exposing such beads to the stimulus or stimuli that cause such degradation prior to a given time, in order to, for example, avoid premature bead degradation and issues that arise from such degradation, including for example poor flow characteristics and aggregation.
  • beads comprise reducible cross-linking groups, such as disulfide groups
  • reducing agents e.g., DTT or other disulfide cleaving reagents.
  • treatment to the beads described herein will, in some cases be provided free of reducing agents, such as DTT.
  • reducing agent free (or DTT free) enzyme preparations in treating the beads described herein.
  • enzymes include, e.g., polymerase enzyme preparations, reverse transcriptase enzyme preparations, ligase enzyme preparations, as well as many other enzyme preparations that may be used to treat the beads described herein.
  • the terms “reducing agent free” or “DTT free” preparations can refer to a preparation having less than about 1/10th, less than about 1/50th, or even less than about 1/lOOth of the lower ranges for such materials used in degrading the beads.
  • the reducing agent free preparation can have less than about 0.01 millimolar (mM), 0.005 mM,
  • the amount of DTT can be undetectable.
  • Numerous chemical triggers may be used to trigger the degradation of beads. Examples of these chemical changes may comprise pH-mediated changes to the integrity of a component within the bead, degradation of a component of a bead via cleavage of cross-linked bonds, and depolymerization of a component of a bead.
  • a bead may be formed from materials that comprise degradable chemical crosslinkers, such as BAC or cystamine. Degradation of such degradable crosslinkers may be accomplished through a number of mechanisms.
  • a bead may be contacted with a chemical degrading agent that may induce oxidation, reduction or other chemical changes.
  • a chemical degrading agent may be a reducing agent, such as dithiothreitol (DTT).
  • reducing agents may include b-mercaptoethanol, (2S)-2-amino-l,4-dimercaptobutane (dithiobutylamine or DTBA), tris(2-carboxyethyl) phosphine (TCEP), or combinations thereof.
  • a reducing agent may degrade the disulfide bonds formed between gel precursors forming the bead, and thus, degrade the bead.
  • a change in pH of a solution such as an increase in pH, may trigger degradation of a bead.
  • exposure to an aqueous solution, such as water may trigger hydrolytic degradation, and thus degradation of the bead.
  • any combination of stimuli may trigger degradation of a bead.
  • a change in pH may enable a chemical agent (e.g., DTT) to become an effective reducing agent.
  • Beads may also be induced to release their contents upon the application of a thermal stimulus.
  • a change in temperature can cause a variety of changes to a bead.
  • heat can cause a solid bead to liquefy.
  • a change in heat may cause melting of a bead such that a portion of the bead degrades.
  • heat may increase the internal pressure of the bead components such that the bead ruptures or explodes. Heat may also act upon heat-sensitive polymers used as materials to construct beads.
  • any suitable agent may degrade beads.
  • changes in temperature or pH may be used to degrade thermo-sensitive or pH-sensitive bonds within beads.
  • chemical degrading agents may be used to degrade chemical bonds within beads by oxidation, reduction or other chemical changes.
  • a chemical degrading agent may be a reducing agent, such as DTT, wherein DTT may degrade the disulfide bonds formed between a crosslinker and gel precursors, thus degrading the bead.
  • a reducing agent may be added to degrade the bead, which may or may not cause the bead to release its contents.
  • reducing agents may include dithiothreitol (DTT), b-mercaptoethanol, (2S)-2-amino-l,4-dimercaptobutane (dithiobutylamine orDTBA), tris(2- carboxyethyl) phosphine (TCEP), or combinations thereof.
  • the reducing agent may be present at a concentration of about O.lmM, 0.5mM, ImM, 5mM, lOmM.
  • the reducing agent may be present at a concentration of at least about O.lmM, 0.5mM, ImM, 5mM, lOmM, or greater than 10 mM.
  • the reducing agent may be present at concentration of at most about lOmM, 5mM, ImM, 0.5mM, O.lmM, or less.
  • any suitable number of molecular tag molecules can be associated with a bead such that, upon release from the bead, the molecular tag molecules (e.g., primer, e.g., barcoded oligonucleotide) are present in the partition at a pre-defmed concentration.
  • the pre-defmed concentration may be selected to facilitate certain reactions for generating a sequencing library, e.g., amplification, within the partition.
  • the pre-defmed concentration of the primer can be limited by the process of producing oligonucleotide bearing beads.
  • a partition of the plurality of partitions may comprise a single biological particle or analyte carrier (e.g., a single cell or a single nucleus of a cell).
  • a partition of the plurality of partitions may comprise multiple biological particles or analyte carriers.
  • Such partitions may be referred to as multiply occupied partitions, and may comprise, for example, two, three, four or more cells and/or microcapsules (e.g., beads) comprising barcoded nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides) within a single partition.
  • the flow characteristics of the biological particle and/or bead containing fluids and partitioning fluids may be controlled to provide for such multiply occupied partitions.
  • the flow parameters may be controlled to provide a given occupancy rate at greater than about 50% of the partitions, greater than about 75%, and in some cases greater than about 80%, 90%, 95%, or higher.
  • additional microcapsules can be used to deliver additional reagents to a partition.
  • the flow and frequency of the different beads into the channel or junction may be controlled to provide for a certain ratio of microcapsules from each source, while ensuring a given pairing or combination of such beads into a partition with a given number of biological particles (e.g., one biological particle and one bead per partition).
  • the partitions described herein may comprise small volumes, for example, less than about 10 microliters (pL), 5pL, lpL, 900 pi coliters (pL), 800 pL, 700 pL, 600 pL, 500 pL, 400pL, 300 pL, 200 pL, lOOpL, 50 pL, 20 pL, 10 pL, 1 pL, 500 nanoliters (nL), 100 nL, 50 nL, or less.
  • small volumes for example, less than about 10 microliters (pL), 5pL, lpL, 900 pi coliters (pL), 800 pL, 700 pL, 600 pL, 500 pL, 400pL, 300 pL, 200 pL, lOOpL, 50 pL, 20 pL, 10 pL, 1 pL, 500 nanoliters (nL), 100 nL, 50 nL, or less.
  • the droplets may have overall volumes that are less than about 1000 pL, 900 pL, 800 pL, 700 pL, 600 pL, 500 pL, 400pL, 300 pL, 200 pL, lOOpL, 50 pL, 20 pL, 10 pL, 1 pL, or less.
  • sample fluid volume e.g., including co-partitioned biological particles and/or beads
  • the sample fluid volume within the partitions may be less than about 90% of the above described volumes, less than about 80%, less than about 70%, less than about 60%, less than about 50%, less than about 40%, less than about 30%, less than about 20%, or less than about 10% of the above described volumes.
  • partitioning species may generate a population or plurality of partitions.
  • any suitable number of partitions can be generated or otherwise provided. For example, at least about 1,000 partitions, at least about 5,000 partitions, at least about 10,000 partitions, at least about 50,000 partitions, at least about 100,000 partitions, at least about 500,000 partitions, at least about 1,000,000 partitions, at least about 5,000,000 partitions at least about 10,000,000 partitions, at least about 50,000,000 partitions, at least about 100,000,000 partitions, at least about 500,000,000 partitions, at least about 1,000,000,000 partitions, or more partitions can be generated or otherwise provided.
  • the plurality of partitions may comprise both unoccupied partitions (e.g., empty partitions) and occupied partitions.
  • a sample may derive from any useful source including any subject, such as a human subject.
  • a sample may comprise material (e.g., one or more analyte carriers) from one or more different sources, such as one or more different subjects.
  • Multiple samples such as multiple samples from a single subject (e.g., multiple samples obtained in the same or different manners from the same or different bodily locations, and/or obtained at the same or different times (e.g., seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years apparat)), or multiple samples from different subjects, may be obtained for analysis as described herein. For example, a first sample may be obtained from a subject at a first time and a second sample may be obtained from the subject at a second time later than the first time.
  • the first time may be before a subject undergoes a treatment regimen or procedure (e.g., to address a disease or condition), and the second time may be during or after the subject undergoes the treatment regimen or procedure.
  • a first sample may be obtained from a first bodily location or system of a subject (e.g., using a first collection technique) and a second sample may be obtained from a second bodily location or system of the subject (e.g., using a second collection technique), which second bodily location or system may be different than the first bodily location or system.
  • multiple samples may be obtained from a subject at a same time from the same or different bodily locations.
  • Different samples may undergo the same or different processing (e.g., as described herein). For example, a first sample may undergo a first processing protocol and a second sample may undergo a second processing protocol.
  • a sample may be a biological sample, such as a cell sample (e.g., as described herein).
  • a sample may include one or more analyte carriers, such as one or more cells and/or cellular constituents, such as one or more cell nuclei.
  • a sample may comprise a plurality of analyte carriers, such as a plurality of cells and/or cellular constituents.
  • Analyte carriers (e.g., cells or cellular constituents, such as cell nuclei) of a sample may be of a single type or a plurality of different types.
  • cells of a sample may include one or more different types or blood cells.
  • Cells and cellular constituents of a sample may be of any type.
  • a cell or cellular constituent may be a mammalian, fungal, plant, bacterial, or other cell type.
  • the cell is a mammalian cell, such as a human cell.
  • the cell may be, for example, a stem cell, liver cell, nerve cell, bone cell, blood cell, reproductive cell, skin cell, skeletal muscle cell, cardiac muscle cell, smooth muscle cell, hair cell, hormone-secreting cell, or glandular cell.
  • the cell may be, for example, an erythrocyte (e.g., red blood cell), a megakaryocyte (e.g., platelet precursor), a monocyte (e.g., white blood cell), a leukocyte, a B cell, a T cell (such as a helper, suppressor, cytotoxic, or natural killer T cell), an osteoclast, a dendritic cell, a connective tissue macrophage, an epidermal Langerhans cell, a microglial cell, a granulocyte, a hybridoma cell, a mast cell, a natural killer cell, a reticulocyte, a hematopoietic stem cell, a myoepithelial cell, a myeloid-derived suppressor cell, a platelet, a thymocyte, a satellite cell, an epithelial cell, an endothelial cell, an epididymal cell, a kidney cell, a liver cell, an adipocyte, a lip
  • the cell may be associated with a cancer, tumor, or neoplasm. In some cases, the cell may be associated with a fetus. In some cases, the cell may be a Jurkat cell.
  • a cell of a biological sample may have any feature or dimension. For example, a cell may have a first dimension, a second dimension, and a third dimension, where the first, second, and third dimensions are approximately the same. In other cases, the first and second dimensions may be approximately the same, and the third dimension may be different, or the first, second, and third dimensions may all be different. In some cases, a cell may comprise a dimension (e.g., a diameter) of at least about 1 pm.
  • a cell may comprise a dimension of at least about 1 micrometer (pm), 2 pm, 3 pm, 4 pm, 5 pm, 6 pm, 7 pm, 8 pm, 9 pm, 10 pm, 11 pm, 12 pm, 13 pm, 14 pm, 15 pm, 16 pm, 17 pm, 18 pm, 19 pm, 20 pm, 25 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm, 50 pm, 55 pm, 60 pm, 65 pm, 70 pm, 75 pm, 80 pm, 85 pm, 90 pm, 100 pm, 120 pm, 140 pm, 160 pm, 180 pm, 200 pm, 250 pm, 300 pm, 350 pm, 400 pm,
  • the cell may comprise a dimension of between about 1 pm and 500 pm, such as between about 1 pm and 100 pm, between about 100 pm and 200 pm, between about 200 pm and 300 pm, between about 300 pm and 400 pm, or between about 400 pm and 500 pm.
  • a cell may comprise a dimension of between about 1 pm and 100 pm. Any or all dimensions of a cell may be variable. For example, the dimensions of a substantially fluid cell may vary over a rapid timescale. Dimensions of a more rigid cell may be fixed or may vary with lesser amplitude.
  • the volume of a cell may be at least about 1 pm 3 . In some cases, the volume of a cell may be at least about 10 pm 3 .
  • the volume of the cell may be at least 1 pm 3 , 2 pm 3 , 3 pm 3 , 4 pm 3 , 5 pm 3 , 6 pm 3 , 7 pm 3 , 8 pm 3 , 9 pm 3 , 10 pm 3 , 12 pm 3 , 14 pm 3 , 16 pm 3 , 18 pm 3 , 20 pm 3 , 25 pm 3 , 30 pm 3 , 35 pm 3 , 40 pm 3 , 45 pm 3 , 50 pm 3 , 55 pm 3 , 60 pm 3 , 65 pm 3 , 70 pm 3 , 75 pm 3 , 80 pm 3 , 85 pm 3 , 90 pm 3 , 95 pm 3 , 100 pm 3 , 125 pm 3 , 150 pm 3 , 175 pm 3 , 200 pm 3 , 250 pm 3 , 300 pm 3 , 350 pm 3
  • a cell may comprise a volume of between about 1 mih 3 and 100 mih 3 , such as between about 1 mih 3 and 10 mih 3 , between aboutlO mih 3 and 50 mih 3 , or between about 50 mih 3 and 100 mih 3 .
  • a cell may comprise a volume of between about 100 pm 3 and 1000 pm 3 , such as between about 100 pm 3 and 500 pm 3 or between about 500 pm 3 and 1000 pm 3 .
  • a cell may comprise a volume between about 1000 pm 3 and 3000 pm 3 , such as between about 1000 pm 3 and 2000 pm 3 or between about 2000 pm 3 and 3000 pm 3 .
  • a cell may comprise a volume between about 1 pm 3 and 3000 pm 3 , such as between about 1 pm 3 and 2000 pm 3 , between about 1 pm 3 and 1000 pm 3 , between about 1 pm 3 and 500 pm 3 , or between about 1 pm 3 and 250 pm 3 .
  • a cell of a biological sample may comprise one or more cross-sections that may be the same or different.
  • a cell may have a first cross-section that is different from a second cross-section a cell may have a first cross-section that is at least about 1 pm.
  • a cell may comprise a cross-section (e.g., a first cross-section) of at least about 1 micrometer (pm), 2 pm, 3 pm, 4 pm, 5 pm, 6 pm, 7 pm, 8 pm, 9 pm, 10 pm, 11 pm, 12 pm, 13 pm, 14 pm, 15 pm, 16 pm, 17 pm, 18 pm, 19 pm, 20 pm, 25 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm,
  • a cross-section e.g., a first cross-section of at least about 1 micrometer (pm), 2 pm, 3 pm, 4 pm, 5 pm, 6 pm, 7 pm, 8 pm, 9 pm, 10 pm, 11 pm, 12 pm, 13 pm, 14 pm, 15 pm, 16 pm, 17 pm, 18 pm, 19 pm, 20 pm, 25 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm,
  • a cell may comprise a cross-section (e.g., a first cross-section) of between about 1 pm and 500 pm, such as between about 1 pm and 100 pm, between about 100 pm and 200 pm, between about 200 pm and 300 pm, between about 300 pm and 400 pm, or between about 400 pm and 500 pm.
  • a cell may comprise a cross-section (e.g., a first cross-section) of between about 1 pm and 100 pm.
  • the cell may have a second cross-section that is at least about 1 pm.
  • the cell may comprise a second cross-section of at least about 1 micrometer (pm), 2 pm, 3 pm, 4 pm, 5 pm, 6 pm, 7 pm, 8 pm, 9 pm, 10 pm, 11 pm, 12 pm, 13 pm, 14 pm, 15 pm, 16 pm, 17 pm, 18 pm, 19 pm, 20 pm, 25 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm,
  • a cell may comprise a second cross-section of between about 1 pm and 500 pm, such as between about 1 pm and 100 pm, between about 100 pm and 200 pm, between about 200 pm and 300 pm, between about 300 pm and 400 pm, or between about 400 pm and 500 pm.
  • a cell may comprise a second cross-section of between about 1 pm and 100 pm.
  • a cross section (e.g., a first cross-section) may correspond to a diameter of a cell.
  • a cell may be approximately spherical.
  • the first cross-section may correspond to the diameter of the cell.
  • the cell may be approximately cylindrical.
  • the first cross-section may correspond to a diameter, length, or width along the approximately cylindrical cell.
  • the cell may comprise a surface.
  • a cell surface may comprise one or more features.
  • a cell may comprise a dendritic receiver, flagella, roughed border, or other feature.
  • a characteristic or set of characteristics of a cell may be changed by one or more conditions.
  • a condition suitable for changing a characteristic or set of characteristics of a cell may be, for example, a temperature, a pH, an ion or salt concentration, a pressure, or another condition.
  • a cell may be exposed to a chemical species that may bring about a change in one or more characteristics of the cell.
  • a stimulus may be used to change one or more characteristics of a cell.
  • the stimulus may be, for example, a thermal stimulus, a photo stimulus, a chemical stimulus, or another stimulus.
  • conditions sufficient to change the one or more characteristics of a cell may comprise one or more different conditions, such as a temperature and a pressure, a pH and a salt concentration, a chemical species and a temperature, or any other combination of conditions.
  • a temperature sufficient for changing one or more characteristics of the cell may be, for example, at least about 0 degrees Celsius (°C), 1 °C, 2 °C, 3 °C, 4 °C, 5 °C, 10 °C, or higher.
  • the temperature may be about 4 °C.
  • a temperature sufficient for changing one or more characteristics of the cell may be, for example, at least about 25 °C, 30 °C, 35 °C, 37 °C, 40 °C, 45 °C, 50 °C, or higher.
  • the temperature may be about 37 °C.
  • a pH sufficient for changing one or more characteristics of the cell may be, for example, between about 5 and 8, such as between about 6 and 7.
  • a biological sample may include a plurality of cells having different dimensions and features.
  • processing of the biological sample such as cell separation and sorting (e.g., as described herein), may affect the distribution of dimensions and cellular features included in the sample by depleting cells having certain features and dimensions and/or isolating cells having certain features and dimensions.
  • a sample may undergo one or more processes in preparation for analysis (e.g., as described herein), including, but not limited to, filtration, selective precipitation, purification, centrifugation, permeabilization, isolation, agitation, heating, and/or other processes.
  • a sample may be filtered to remove a contaminant or other materials.
  • a filtration process may comprise the use of microfluidics (e.g., to separate analyte carriers of different sizes, types, charges, or other features).
  • a sample comprising one or more cells may be processed to separate the one or more cells from other materials in the sample (e.g., using centrifugation and/or another process).
  • cells and/or cellular constituents of a sample may be processed to separate and/or sort groups of cells and/or cellular constituents, such as to separate and/or sort cells and/or cellular constituents of different types.
  • cell separation include, but are not limited to, separation of white blood cells or immune cells from other blood cells and components, separation of circulating tumor cells from blood, and separation of bacteria from bodily cells and/or environmental materials.
  • a separation process may comprise a positive selection process (e.g., targeting of a cell type of interest for retention for subsequent downstream analysis, such as by use of a monoclonal antibody that targets a surface marker of the cell type of interest), a negative selection process (e.g., removal of one or more cell types and retention of one or more other cell types of interest), and/or a depletion process (e.g., removal of a single cell type from a sample, such as removal of red blood cells from peripheral blood mononuclear cells).
  • a positive selection process e.g., targeting of a cell type of interest for retention for subsequent downstream analysis, such as by use of a monoclonal antibody that targets a surface marker of the cell type of interest
  • a negative selection process e.g., removal of one or more cell types and retention of one or more other cell types of interest
  • a depletion process e.g., removal of a single cell type from a sample, such as removal of red blood cells from peripheral blood mononuclear
  • Separation of one or more different types of cells may comprise, for example, centrifugation, filtration, microfluidic-based sorting, flow cytometry, fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS), magnetic-activated cell sorting (MACS), buoyancy-activated cell sorting (BACS), or any other useful method.
  • FACS fluorescence-activated cell sorting
  • MCS magnetic-activated cell sorting
  • AFS buoyancy-activated cell sorting
  • a flow cytometry method may be used to detect cells and/or cellular constituents based on a parameter such as a size, morphology, or protein expression.
  • Flow cytometry -based cell sorting may comprise injecting a sample into a sheath fluid that conveys the cells and/or cellular constituents of the sample into a measurement region one at a time.
  • a light source such as a laser may interrogate the cells and/or cellular constituents and scattered light and/or fluorescence may be detected and converted into digital signals.
  • a nozzle system e.g., a vibrating nozzle system
  • droplets e.g., aqueous droplets
  • Droplets including cells and/or cellular constituents of interest e.g., as determined via optical detection
  • may be labeled with an electric charge e.g., using an electrical charging ring, which charge may be used to separate such droplets from droplets including other cells and/or cellular constituents.
  • FACS may comprise labeling cells and/or cellular constituents with fluorescent markers (e.g., using internal and/or external biomarkers). Cells and/or cellular constituents may then be measured and identified one by one and sorted based on the emitted fluorescence of the marker or absence thereof.
  • MACS may use micro- or nano-scale magnetic particles to bind to cells and/or cellular constituents (e.g., via an antibody interaction with cell surface markers) to facilitate magnetic isolation of cells and/or cellular constituents of interest from other components of a sample (e.g., using a column-based analysis).
  • BACS may use microbubbles (e.g., glass microbubbles) labeled with antibodies to target cells of interest.
  • Cells and/or cellular components coupled to microbubbles may float to a surface of a solution, thereby separating target cells and/or cellular components from other components of a sample.
  • Cell separation techniques may be used to enrich for populations of cells of interest (e.g., prior to partitioning, as described herein).
  • a sample comprising a plurality of cells including a plurality of cells of a given type may be subjected to a positive separation process.
  • the plurality of cells of the given type may be labeled with a fluorescent marker (e.g., based on an expressed cell surface marker or another marker) and subjected to a FACS process to separate these cells from other cells of the plurality of cells.
  • the selected cells may then be subjected to subsequent partition-based analysis (e.g., as described herein) or other downstream analysis.
  • the fluorescent marker may be removed prior to such analysis or may be retained.
  • the fluorescent marker may comprise an identifying feature, such as a nucleic acid barcode sequence and/or unique molecular identifier.
  • a first sample comprising a first plurality of cells including a first plurality of cells of a given type (e.g., immune cells expressing a particular marker or combination of markers) and a second sample comprising a second plurality of cells including a second plurality of cells of the given type may be subjected to a positive separation process.
  • the first and second samples may be collected from the same or different subjects, at the same or different types, from the same or different bodily locations or systems, using the same or different collection techniques.
  • the first sample may be from a first subject and the second sample may be from a second subject different than the first subject.
  • the first plurality of cells of the first sample may be provided a first plurality of fluorescent markers configured to label the first plurality of cells of the given type.
  • the second plurality of cells of the second sample may be provided a second plurality of fluorescent markers configured to label the second plurality of cells of the given type.
  • the first plurality of fluorescent markers may include a first identifying feature, such as a first barcode, while the second plurality of fluorescent markers may include a second identifying feature, such as a second barcode, that is different than the first identifying feature.
  • the first plurality of fluorescent markers and the second plurality of fluorescent markers may fluoresce at the same intensities and over the same range of wavelengths upon excitation with a same excitation source (e.g., light source, such as a laser).
  • the first and second samples may then be combined and subjected to a FACS process to separate cells of the given type from other cells based on the first plurality of fluorescent markers labeling the first plurality of cells of the given type and the second plurality of fluorescent markers labeling the second plurality of cells of the given type.
  • the first and second samples may undergo separate FACS processes and the positively selected cells of the given type from the first sample and the positively selected cells of the given type from the second sample may then be combined for subsequent analysis.
  • the encoded identifying features of the different fluorescent markers may be used to identify cells originating from the first sample and cells originating from the second sample.
  • the first and second identifying features may be configured to interact (e.g., in partitions, as described herein) with nucleic acid barcode molecules (e.g., as described herein) to generate barcoded nucleic acid products detectable using, e.g., nucleic acid sequencing.
  • a single or integrated process workflow may permit the processing, identification, and/or analysis of more or multiple analytes, more or multiple types of analytes, and/or more or multiple types of analyte characterizations.
  • one or more labelling agents capable of binding to or otherwise coupling to one or more cell features may be used to characterize analyte carriers and/or cell features.
  • cell features include cell surface features.
  • Cell surface features may include, but are not limited to, a receptor, an antigen, a surface protein, a transmembrane protein, a cluster of differentiation protein, a protein channel, a protein pump, a carrier protein, a phospholipid, a glycoprotein, a glycolipid, a cell-cell interaction protein complex, an antigen-presenting complex, a major histocompatibility complex, an engineered T-cell receptor, a T-cell receptor, a B-cell receptor, a chimeric antigen receptor, a gap junction, an adherens junction, or any combination thereof.
  • cell features may include intracellular analytes, such as proteins, protein modifications (e.g., phosphorylation status or other post-translational modifications), nuclear proteins, nuclear membrane proteins, or any combination thereof.
  • a labelling agent may include, but is not limited to, a protein, a peptide, an antibody (or an epitope binding fragment thereof), a lipophilic moiety (such as cholesterol), a cell surface receptor binding molecule, a receptor ligand, a small molecule, a bi- specific antibody, a bi-specific T-cell engager, a T-cell receptor engager, a B-cell receptor engager, a pro-body, an aptamer, a monobody, an affimer, a darpin, and a protein scaffold, or any combination thereof.
  • the labelling agents can include (e.g., are attached to) a reporter oligonucleotide that is indicative of the cell surface feature to which the binding group binds.
  • the reporter oligonucleotide may comprise a barcode sequence that permits identification of the labelling agent.
  • a labelling agent that is specific to one type of cell feature e.g., a first cell surface feature
  • a labelling agent that is specific to a different cell feature e.g., a second cell surface feature
  • a different reporter oligonucleotide coupled thereto e.g., a second cell surface feature
  • reporter oligonucleotides for a description of exemplary labelling agents, reporter oligonucleotides, and methods of use, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. 10,550,429; U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190177800; and 20190367969, each of which is herein entirely incorporated by reference for all purposes.
  • a library of potential cell feature labelling agents may be provided, where the respective cell feature labelling agents are associated with nucleic acid reporter molecules, such that a different reporter oligonucleotide sequence is associated with each labelling agent capable of binding to a specific cell feature.
  • different members of the library may be characterized by the presence of a different oligonucleotide sequence label.
  • an antibody capable of binding to a first protein may have associated with it a first reporter oligonucleotide sequence
  • an antibody capable of binding to a second protein may have a different reporter oligonucleotide sequence associated with it.
  • Labelling agents capable of binding to or otherwise coupling to one or more analyte carriers may be used to characterize an analyte carrier as belonging to a particular set of analyte carriers.
  • labeling agents may be used to label a sample of cells or a group of cells. In this way, a group of cells may be labeled as different from another group of cells.
  • a first group of cells may originate from a first sample and a second group of cells may originate from a second sample.
  • Labelling agents may allow the first group and second group to have a different labeling agent (or reporter oligonucleotide associated with the labeling agent). This may, for example, facilitate multiplexing, where cells of the first group and cells of the second group may be labeled separately and then pooled together for downstream analysis.
  • the downstream detection of a label may indicate analytes as belonging to a particular group.
  • a reporter oligonucleotide may be linked to an antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof, and labeling an analyte carrier may comprise subjecting the antibody- linked barcode molecule or the epitope binding fragment-linked barcode molecule to conditions suitable for binding the antibody to a molecule present on a surface of the analyte carrier.
  • the binding affinity between the antibody or the epitope binding fragment thereof and the molecule present on the surface may be within a desired range to ensure that the antibody or the epitope binding fragment thereof remains bound to the molecule.
  • the binding affinity may be within a desired range to ensure that the antibody or the epitope binding fragment thereof remains bound to the molecule during various sample processing steps, such as partitioning and/or nucleic acid amplification or extension.
  • a dissociation constant (Kd) between the antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof and the molecule to which it binds may be less than about 100 mM, 90 mM, 80 mM, 70 mM, 60 mM, 50 m M, 40 pM, 30 pM, 20 pM, 10 mM, 9 pM, 8 mM, 7 pM, 6 pM, 5 mM, 4 pM, 3 pM, 2 mM, 1 mM, 900 nM, 800 nM, 700 nM.
  • a reporter oligonucleotide may be coupled to a cell-penetrating peptide (CPP), and labeling cells may comprise delivering the GPP coupled reporter oligonucleotide into an analyte carrier.
  • Labeling analyte carriers may comprise delivering the CPP conjugated oligonucleotide into a cell and/or cell bead by the cell -penetrating peptide.
  • a cell-penetrating peptide that can be used in the methods provided herein can comprise at least one non-functional cysteine residue, which may be either free or derivatized to form a disulfide link with an oligonucleotide that has been modified for such linkage.
  • Non-limiting examples of cell-penetrating peptides that can be used in embodiments herein include penetratin, transportan, pi si, TAT(48 ⁇ 60), pVEC, MTS, and MAP.
  • Cell-penetrating peptides useful in the methods provided herein can have the capability of inducing cell penetration for at least about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% of cells of a cell population.
  • the cell -penetrating peptide may be an arginine-rich peptide transporter.
  • H e cell-penetrating peptide may be Penetratin or the Tat peptide.
  • a reporter oligonucleotide may be coupled to a fiuorophore or dye, and labeling cells may comprise subjecting the fluorophore-linked barcode molecule to conditions suitable for binding the fiuorophore to the surface of the analyte carrier.
  • fluorophores can interact strongly with lipid bilayers and labeling analyte carriers may comprise subjecting the fluorophore-linked barcode molecule to conditions such that the fiuorophore binds to or is inserted into a membrane of the analyte carrier.
  • the fiuorophore is a water-soluble, organic fiuorophore.
  • the fiuorophore is Alexa 532 maieimide, tetramethylrhodamine-5-maieimide (TMR maieimide), BODIPY-TMR maieimide, Sulfo-Cy3 maieimide, Alexa 546 carboxylic acid/su ccinimidyl ester, Atto 550 ma!eimide, Cy3 carboxylic acid/succinimidyl ester, Cy3B carboxylic acid/succininiidyl ester, Atto 565 biotin, Sulforhodamine B, Alexa 594 maieimide, Texas Red maleimide, Aiexa 633 maleitmde, Abberior STAR 635P azide, Atto 647N maleimide, Atto 647 SE, or Suifo-Cy5 maleimide.
  • TMR maieimide tetramethylrhodamine-5-maieimide
  • BODIPY-TMR maieimide Sul
  • a reporter oligonucleotide may be coupled to a lipophilic molecule, and labeling analyte carriers may comprise delivering the nucleic acid barcode molecule to a membrane of the analyte carrier or a nuclear membrane by the lipophilic molecule.
  • lipophilic molecules can associate with and/or insert into lipid membranes such as cell membranes and nuclear membranes. In some cases, the insertion can he reversible.
  • the association between the lipophilic molecule and analyte carrier may be such that the analyte carrier retains the lipophilic molecule (e.g., and assoeiated components, such as nucleic acid barcode molecules, thereof) during subsequent processing (e.g., partitioning, cell perrneabilization, amplification, pooling, etc.).
  • the reporter nucleotide may enter into the intracellular space and/or a cell nucleus.
  • a reporter oligonucleotide may be part of a nucleic acid molecule comprising any number of functional sequences, as described elsewhere herein, such as a target capture sequence, a random primer sequence, and the like, and coupled to another nucleic acid molecule that is, or is derived from, the analyte.
  • the cells Prior to partitioning, the cells may be incubated with the library of labelling agents, that may be labelling agents to a broad panel of different cell features, e.g., receptors, proteins, etc., and which include their associated reporter oligonucleotides. Unbound labelling agents may be washed from the cells, and the cells may then be co-partitioned (e.g., into droplets or wells ) along with partition-specific barcode oligonucleotides (e.g., attached to a support, such as a bead or gel bead) as described elsewhere herein.
  • labelling agents may be labelling agents to a broad panel of different cell features, e.g., receptors, proteins, etc., and which include their associated reporter oligonucleotides. Unbound labelling agents may be washed from the cells, and the cells may then be co-partitioned (e.g., into droplets or wells ) along with partition-specific barcode oligonucle
  • the partitions may include the cell or cells, as well as the bound labelling agents and their known, associated reporter oligonucleotides.
  • a labelling agent that is specific to a particular cell feature may have a first plurality of the labelling agent (e.g., an antibody or lipophilic moiety) coupled to a first reporter oligonucleotide and a second plurality of the labelling agent coupled to a second reporter oligonucleotide.
  • the first plurality of the labeling agent and second plurality of the labeling agent may interact with different cells, cell populations or samples, allowing a particular report oligonucleotide to indicate a particular cell population (or cell or sample) and cell feature.
  • different samples or groups can be independently processed and subsequently combined together for pooled analysis (e.g., partition-based barcoding as described elsewhere herein). See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190323088, which is hereby entirely incorporated by reference for all purposes.
  • libraries of labelling agents may be associated with a particular cell feature as well as be used to identify analytes as originating from a particular analyte carrier, population, or sample.
  • the analyte carriers may be incubated with a plurality of libraries and a given analyte carrier may comprise multiple labelling agents.
  • a cell may comprise coupled thereto a lipophilic labeling agent and an antibody.
  • the lipophilic labeling agent may indicate that the cell is a member of a particular cell sample, whereas the antibody may indicate that the cell comprises a particular analyte.
  • the reporter oligonucleotides and labelling agents may allow multi -analyte, multiplexed analyses to be performed.
  • these reporter oligonucleotides may comprise nucleic acid barcode sequences that permit identification of the labelling agent which the reporter oligonucleotide is coupled to.
  • the use of oligonucleotides as the reporter may provide advantages of being able to generate significant diversity in terms of sequence, while also being readily attachable to most biomolecules, e.g., antibodies, etc., as well as being readily detected, e.g., using sequencing or array technologies.
  • Attachment (coupling) of the reporter oligonucleotides to the labelling agents may be achieved through any of a variety of direct or indirect, covalent or non-covalent associations or attachments.
  • oligonucleotides may be covalently attached to a portion of a labelling agent (such a protein, e.g., an antibody or antibody fragment) using chemical conjugation techniques (e.g., Lightning-Link® antibody labelling kits available from Innova Biosciences), as well as other non-covalent attachment mechanisms, e.g., using biotinylated antibodies and oligonucleotides (or beads that include one or more biotinylated linker, coupled to oligonucleotides) with an avidin or streptavidin linker.
  • a labelling agent such as a protein, e.g., an antibody or antibody fragment
  • chemical conjugation techniques e.g., Lightning-Link® antibody labelling kits available from Innova Biosciences
  • other non-covalent attachment mechanisms
  • Antibody and oligonucleotide biotinylation techniques are available. See, e.g., Fang, et ak, “Fluoride-Cleavable Biotinylation Phosphoramidite for 5'-end-Labelling and Affinity Purification of Synthetic Oligonucleotides,” Nucleic Acids Res. Jan. 15, 2003; 31(2):708-715, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Likewise, protein and peptide biotinylation techniques have been developed and are readily available. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,265,552, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
  • click reaction chemistry such as a Methyltetrazine-PEG5-NHS Ester reaction, a TCO-PEG4-NHS Ester reaction, or the like, may be used to couple reporter oligonucleotides to labelling agents.
  • Commercially available kits such as those from Thunderlink and Abeam, and techniques common in the art may be used to couple reporter oligonucleotides to labelling agents as appropriate.
  • a labelling agent is indirectly (e.g., via hybridization) coupled to a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a barcode sequence that identifies the label agent.
  • the labelling agent may be directly coupled (e.g., covalently bound) to a hybridization oligonucleotide that comprises a sequence that hybridizes with a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide.
  • Hybridization of the hybridization oligonucleotide to the reporter oligonucleotide couples the labelling agent to the reporter oligonucleotide.
  • the reporter oligonucleotides are releasable from the labelling agent, such as upon application of a stimulus.
  • the reporter oligonucleotide may be attached to the labeling agent through a labile bond (e.g., chemically labile, photolabile, thermally labile, etc.) as generally described for releasing molecules from supports elsewhere herein.
  • the reporter oligonucleotides described herein may include one or more functional sequences that can be used in subsequent processing, such as an adapter sequence, a unique molecular identifier (UMI) sequence, a sequencer specific flow cell attachment sequence (such as an P5, P7, or partial P5 or P7 sequence), a primer or primer binding sequence, a sequencing primer or primer biding sequence (such as an Rl, R2, or partial R1 or R2 sequence).
  • UMI unique molecular identifier
  • the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide and a label.
  • a label can be fluorophore, a radioisotope, a molecule capable of a colorimetric reaction, a magnetic particle, or any other suitable molecule or compound capable of detection.
  • the label can be conjugated to a labelling agent (or reporter oligonucleotide) either directly or indirectly (e.g., the label can be conjugated to a molecule that can bind to the labelling agent or reporter oligonucleotide).
  • a label is conjugated to an oligonucleotide that is complementary to a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide, and the oligonucleotide may be allowed to hybridize to the reporter oligonucleotide.
  • FIG. 11 describes exemplary labelling agents (1110, 1120, 1130) comprising reporter oligonucleotides (1140) attached thereto.
  • Labelling agent 1110 e.g., any of the labelling agents described herein
  • Reporter oligonucleotide 1140 may comprise barcode sequence 1142 that identifies labelling agent 1110.
  • Reporter oligonucleotide 1140 may also comprise one or more functional sequences that can be used in subsequent processing, such as an adapter sequence, a unique molecular identifier (UMI) sequence, a sequencer specific flow cell attachment sequence (such as an P5, P7, or partial P5 or P7 sequence), a primer or primer binding sequence, or a sequencing primer or primer biding sequence (such as an Rl, R2, or partial Rl or R2 sequence).
  • UMI unique molecular identifier
  • sequencer specific flow cell attachment sequence such as an P5, P7, or partial P5 or P7 sequence
  • primer or primer binding sequence such as an Rl, R2, or partial Rl or R2 sequence.
  • reporter oligonucleotide 1140 conjugated to a labelling agent comprises a primer sequence 1141, a barcode sequence that identifies the labelling agent (e.g., 1110, 1120, 1130), and functional sequence 1143.
  • Functional sequence 1143 may be configured to hybridize to a complementary sequence, such as a complementary sequence present on a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1190 (not shown), such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1190 is attached to a support (e.g., a bead, such as a gel bead), such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1190 may be attached to the support via a releasable linkage (e.g., comprising a labile bond), such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • reporter oligonucleotide 1140 comprises one or more additional functional sequences, such as those described above.
  • the labelling agent 1110 is a protein or polypeptide (e.g., an antigen or prospective antigen) comprising reporter oligonucleotide 1140.
  • Reporter oligonucleotide 1140 comprises barcode sequence 1142 that identifies polypeptide 1110 and can be used to infer the presence of an analyte, e.g., a binding partner of polypeptide 1110 (i.e., a molecule or compound to which polypeptide 1110 can bind).
  • the labelling agent 1110 is a lipophilic moiety (e.g., cholesterol) comprising reporter oligonucleotide 1140, where the lipophilic moiety is selected such that labelling agent 1110 integrates into a membrane of a cell or nucleus.
  • Reporter oligonucleotide 1140 comprises barcode sequence 1142 that identifies lipophilic moiety 1110 which in some instances is used to tag cells (e.g., groups of cells, cell samples, etc.) and may be used for multiplex analyses as described elsewhere herein.
  • the labelling agent is an antibody 1120 (or an epitope binding fragment thereof) comprising reporter oligonucleotide 1140.
  • Reporter oligonucleotide 1140 comprises barcode sequence 1142 that identifies antibody 1120 and can be used to infer the presence of, e.g., a target of antibody 1120 (i.e., a molecule or compound to which antibody 1120 binds).
  • labelling agent 1130 comprises an MHC molecule 1131 comprising peptide 1132 and reporter oligonucleotide 1140 that identifies peptide 1132.
  • the MHC molecule is coupled to a support 1133.
  • support 1133 may be a polypeptide, such as streptavidin, or a polysaccharide, such as dextran.
  • reporter oligonucleotide 1140 may be directly or indirectly coupled to MHC labelling agent 1130 in any suitable manner.
  • reporter oligonucleotide 1140 may be coupled to MHC molecule 1131, support 1133, or peptide 1132.
  • labelling agent 1130 comprises a plurality of MHC molecules, (e.g. is an MHC multimer, which may be coupled to a support (e.g., 1133)).
  • Class I and/or Class II MHC multimers that can be utilized with the compositions, methods, and systems disclosed herein, e.g., MHC tetramers, MHC pentamers (MHC assembled via a coiled-coil domain, e.g., Pro5® MHC Class I Pentamers, (Prolmmune, Ltd.), MHC octamers, MHC dodecamers, MHC decorated dextran molecules (e.g., MHC Dextramer® (Immudex)), etc.
  • MHC tetramers MHC pentamers (MHC assembled via a coiled-coil domain
  • Pro5® MHC Class I Pentamers Pro5® MHC Class I Pentamers
  • MHC octamers MHC dodecamers
  • MHC decorated dextran molecules e.g., MHC Dextramer® (Immudex)
  • exemplary labelling agents including antibody and MHC -based labelling agents, reporter oligonu
  • FIG. 13 illustrates another example of a barcode carrying bead.
  • analysis of multiple analytes may comprise nucleic acid barcode molecules as generally depicted in FIG. 13.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules 1310 and 1320 are attached to support 1330 via a releasable linkage 1340 (e.g., comprising a labile bond) as described elsewhere herein.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1310 may comprise adapter sequence 1311, barcode sequence 1312 and adapter sequence 1313.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1320 may comprise adapter sequence 1321, barcode sequence 1312, and adapter sequence 1323, wherein adapter sequence 1323 comprises a different sequence than adapter sequence 1313.
  • adapter 1311 and adapter 1321 comprise the same sequence.
  • adapter 1311 and adapter 1321 comprise different sequences.
  • support 1330 is shown comprising nucleic acid barcode molecules 1310 and 1320, any suitable number of barcode molecules comprising common barcode sequence 1312 are contemplated herein.
  • support 1330 further comprises nucleic acid barcode molecule 1350.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1350 may comprise adapter sequence 1351, barcode sequence 1312 and adapter sequence 1353, wherein adapter sequence 1353 comprises a different sequence than adapter sequence 1313 and 1323.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules e.g., 1310, 1320, 1350
  • nucleic acid barcode molecules 1310, 1320 or 1350 may interact with analytes as described elsewhere herein, for example, as depicted in FIGs. 12A-C.
  • sequence 1223 may be complementary to an adapter sequence of a reporter oligonucleotide.
  • Cells may be contacted with one or more reporter oligonucleotide 1220 conjugated labelling agents 1210 (e.g., polypeptide, antibody, or others described elsewhere herein).
  • the cells may be further processed prior to barcoding.
  • processing steps may include one or more washing and/or cell sorting steps.
  • a cell that is bound to labelling agent 1210 which is conjugated to oligonucleotide 1220 and support 1230 e.g., a bead, such as a gel bead
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 is partitioned into a partition amongst a plurality of partitions (e.g., a droplet of a droplet emulsion or a well of a microwell array).
  • the partition comprises at most a single cell bound to labelling agent 1210.
  • reporter oligonucleotide 1220 conjugated to labelling agent 1210 comprises a first adapter sequence 1211 (e.g., a primer sequence), a barcode sequence 1212 that identifies the labelling agent 1210 (e.g., the polypeptide, antibody, or peptide of a pMHC molecule or complex), and an adapter sequence 1213.
  • Adapter sequence 1213 may be configured to hybridize to a complementary sequence, such as sequence 1223 present on a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290.
  • oligonucleotide 1220 comprises one or more additional functional sequences, such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • Barcoded nucleic may be generated (e.g., via a nucleic acid reaction, such as nucleic acid extension or ligation) from the constructs described in FIGs. 12A-C.
  • sequence 1213 may then be hybridized to complementary sequence 1223 to generate (e.g., via a nucleic acid reaction, such as nucleic acid extension or ligation) a barcoded nucleic acid molecule comprising cell (e.g., partition specific) barcode sequence 1222 (or a reverse complement thereof) and reporter barcode sequence 1212 (or a reverse complement thereof).
  • Barcoded nucleic acid molecules can then be optionally processed as described elsewhere herein, e.g., to amplify the molecules and/or append sequencing platform specific sequences to the fragments. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 2018/0105808, which is hereby entirely incorporated by reference for all purposes. Barcoded nucleic acid molecules, or derivatives generated therefrom, can then be sequenced on a suitable sequencing platform.
  • analysis of multiple analytes may be performed.
  • the workflow may comprise a workflow as generally depicted in any of FIGs. 12A-C, or a combination of workflows for an individual analyte, as described elsewhere herein.
  • the workflow may comprise a workflow as generally depicted in any of FIGs. 12A-C, or a combination of workflows for an individual analyte, as described elsewhere herein.
  • multiple analytes can be analyzed.
  • analysis of an analyte comprises a workflow as generally depicted in FIGs. 12A.
  • a nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 may be co-partitioned with the one or more analytes.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 is attached to a support 1230 (e.g., a bead, such as a gel bead), such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 may be attached to support 1230 via a releasable linkage 1240 (e.g., comprising a labile bond), such as those described elsewhere herein.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 may comprise a barcode sequence 1221 and optionally comprise other additional sequences, for example, a UMI sequence 1222 (or other functional sequences described elsewhere herein).
  • the nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 may comprise a sequence 1223 that may be complementary to another nucleic acid sequence, such that it may hybridize to a particular sequence.
  • sequence 1223 may comprise a poly-T sequence and may be used to hybridize to mRNA.
  • nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 comprises sequence 1223 complementary to a sequence of RNA molecule 1260 from a cell.
  • sequence 1223 comprises a sequence specific for an RNA molecule.
  • Sequence 1223 may comprise a known or targeted sequence or a random sequence.
  • a nucleic acid extension reaction may be performed, thereby generating a barcoded nucleic acid product comprising sequence 1223, the barcode sequence 1221, UMI sequence 1222, any other functional sequence, and a sequence corresponding to the RNA molecule 1260.
  • sequence 1223 may be complementary to an overhang sequence or an adapter sequence that has been appended to an analyte. For example, referring to FIG.
  • primer 1250 comprises a sequence complementary to a sequence of nucleic acid molecule 1260 (such as an RNA encoding for a BCR sequence) from an analyte carrier.
  • primer 1250 comprises one or more sequences 1251 that are not complementary to RNA molecule 1260.
  • Sequence 1251 may be a functional sequence as described elsewhere herein, for example, an adapter sequence, a sequencing primer sequence, or a sequence the facilitates coupling to a flow cell of a sequencer.
  • primer 1250 comprises a poly-T sequence.
  • primer 1250 comprises a sequence complementary to a target sequence in an RNA molecule.
  • primer 1250 comprises a sequence complementary to a region of an immune molecule, such as the constant region of a TCR or BCR sequence.
  • Primer 1250 is hybridized to nucleic acid molecule 1260 and complementary molecule 1270 is generated ( see Panel 1202).
  • complementary molecule 1270 may be cDNA generated in a reverse transcription reaction.
  • an additional sequence may be appended to complementary molecule 1270.
  • the reverse transcriptase enzyme may be selected such that several non-templated bases 1280 (e.g., a poly-C sequence) are appended to the cDNA.
  • a terminal transferase may also be used to append the additional sequence.
  • Nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 comprises a sequence 1224 complementary to the non-templated bases, and the reverse transcriptase performs a template switching reaction onto nucleic acid barcode molecule 1290 to generate a barcoded nucleic acid molecule comprising cell (e.g., partition specific) barcode sequence 1222 (or a reverse complement thereof) and a sequence of complementary molecule 1270 (or a portion thereof).
  • sequence 1223 comprises a sequence complementary to a region of an immune molecule, such as the constant region of a TCR or BCR sequence. Sequence 1223 is hybridized to nucleic acid molecule 1260 and a complementary molecule 1270 is generated.
  • complementary molecule 1270 may be generated in a reverse transcription reaction generating a barcoded nucleic acid molecule comprising cell (e.g., partition specific) barcode sequence 1222 (or a reverse complement thereof) and a sequence of complementary molecule 1270 (or a portion thereof). Additional methods and compositions suitable for barcoding cDNA generated from mRNA transcripts including those encoding V(D)J regions of an immune cell receptor and/or barcoding methods and composition including a template switch oligonucleotide are described in International Patent Application WO2018/075693, U.S. Patent Publication No. 2018/0105808, U.S. Patent Publication No. 2015/0376609, filed June 26, 2015, and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2019/0367969, , each of which applications is herein entirely incorporated by reference for all purposes.
  • biological particles may be partitioned along with lysis reagents in order to release the contents of the biological particles within the partition.
  • the lysis agents can be contacted with the biological particle suspension concurrently with, or immediately prior to, the introduction of the biological particles into the partitioning junction/droplet generation zone (e.g., junction 210), such as through an additional channel or channels upstream of the channel junction.
  • biological particles may be partitioned along with other reagents, as will be described further below.
  • the methods and systems of the present disclosure may comprise microfluidic devices and methods of use thereof, which may be used for co-partitioning analyte carriers or analyte carriers with reagents.
  • microfluidic devices and methods of use thereof may be used for co-partitioning analyte carriers or analyte carriers with reagents.
  • the lysis reagents can facilitate the release of the contents of the biological particles within the partition.
  • the contents released in a partition may remain discrete from the contents of other partitions.
  • the channel segments of the microfluidic devices described elsewhere herein may be coupled to any of a variety of different fluid sources or receiving components, including reservoirs, tubing, manifolds, or fluidic components of other systems.
  • the microfluidic channel structures may have various geometries and/or configurations. For example, a microfluidic channel structure can have more than two channel junctions.
  • a microfluidic channel structure can have 2, 3, 4, 5 channel segments or more each carrying the same or different types of beads, reagents, and/or biological particles that meet at a channel junction. Fluid flow in each channel segment may be controlled to control the partitioning of the different elements into droplets. Fluid may be directed flow along one or more channels or reservoirs via one or more fluid flow units.
  • a fluid flow unit can comprise compressors (e.g., providing positive pressure), pumps (e.g., providing negative pressure), actuators, and the like to control flow of the fluid. Fluid may also or otherwise be controlled via applied pressure differentials, centrifugal force, electrokinetic pumping, vacuum, capillary or gravity flow, or the like.
  • lysis agents include bioactive reagents, such as lysis enzymes that are used for lysis of different cell types, e.g., gram positive or negative bacteria, plants, yeast, mammalian, etc., such as lysozymes, achromopeptidase, lysostaphin, labiase, kitalase, lyticase, and a variety of other lysis enzymes available from, e.g., Sigma-Aldrich, Inc. (St Louis, MO), as well as other commercially available lysis enzymes.
  • Other lysis agents may additionally or alternatively be co-partitioned with the biological particles to cause the release of the biological particle’s contents into the partitions.
  • surfactant-based lysis solutions may be used to lyse cells, although these may be less desirable for emulsion based systems where the surfactants can interfere with stable emulsions.
  • lysis solutions may include non-ionic surfactants such as, for example, TritonX-100 and Tween 20.
  • lysis solutions may include ionic surfactants such as, for example, sarcosyl and sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS).
  • Electroporation, thermal, acoustic or mechanical cellular disruption may also be used in certain cases, e.g., non-emulsion based partitioning such as encapsulation of biological particles that may be in addition to or in place of droplet partitioning, where any pore size of the encapsulate is sufficiently small to retain nucleic acid fragments of a given size, following cellular disruption.
  • non-emulsion based partitioning such as encapsulation of biological particles that may be in addition to or in place of droplet partitioning, where any pore size of the encapsulate is sufficiently small to retain nucleic acid fragments of a given size, following cellular disruption.
  • reagents can also be co-partitioned with the analyte carriers, including, for example, DNase and RNase inactivating agents or inhibitors, such as proteinase K, chelating agents, such as EDTA, and other reagents employed in removing or otherwise reducing negative activity or impact of different cell lysate components on subsequent processing of nucleic acids.
  • DNase and RNase inactivating agents or inhibitors such as proteinase K
  • chelating agents such as EDTA
  • the analyte carriers may be exposed to an appropriate stimulus to release the analyte carriers or their contents from a co-partitioned microcapsule.
  • a chemical stimulus may be co-partitioned along with an encapsulated analyte carrier to allow for the degradation of the microcapsule and release of the cell or its contents into the larger partition.
  • this stimulus may be the same as the stimulus described elsewhere herein for release of nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides) from their respective microcapsule (e.g., bead).
  • this may be a different and non-overlapping stimulus, in order to allow an encapsulated analyte carrier to be released into a partition at a different time from the release of nucleic acid molecules into the same partition.
  • encapsulating cells also referred to as a “cell bead”
  • U.S. Pat. 10,428,326 and U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190100632 which are each incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Additional reagents may also be co-partitioned with the biological particles, such as endonucleases to fragment a biological particle’s DNA, DNA polymerase enzymes and dNTPs used to amplify the biological particle’s nucleic acid fragments and to attach the barcode molecular tags to the amplified fragments.
  • Other enzymes may be co-partitioned, including without limitation, polymerase, transposase, ligase, proteinase K, DNAse, etc.
  • Additional reagents may also include reverse transcriptase enzymes, including enzymes with terminal transferase activity, primers and oligonucleotides, and switch oligonucleotides (also referred to herein as “switch oligos” or “template switching oligonucleotides”) which can be used for template switching.
  • reverse transcriptase enzymes including enzymes with terminal transferase activity
  • primers and oligonucleotides include primers and oligonucleotides, and switch oligonucleotides (also referred to herein as “switch oligos” or “template switching oligonucleotides”) which can be used for template switching.
  • switch oligonucleotides also referred to herein as “switch oligos” or “template switching oligonucleotides” which can be used for template switching.
  • template switching can be used to increase the length of a cDNA.
  • template switching can
  • cDNA can be generated from reverse transcription of a template, e.g., cellular mRNA, where a reverse transcriptase with terminal transferase activity can add additional nucleotides, e.g., polyC, to the cDNA in a template independent manner.
  • Switch oligos can include sequences complementary to the additional nucleotides, e.g., polyG.
  • the additional nucleotides (e.g., polyC) on the cDNA can hybridize to the additional nucleotides (e.g., polyG) on the switch oligo, whereby the switch oligo can be used by the reverse transcriptase as template to further extend the cDNA.
  • Template switching oligonucleotides may comprise a hybridization region and a template region.
  • the hybridization region can comprise any sequence capable of hybridizing to the target.
  • the hybridization region comprises a series of G bases to complement the overhanging C bases at the 3’ end of a cDNA molecule.
  • the series of G bases may comprise 1 G base, 2 G bases, 3 G bases, 4 G bases, 5 G bases or more than 5 G bases.
  • the template sequence can comprise any sequence to be incorporated into the cDNA.
  • the template region comprises at least 1 (e.g., at least 2, 3, 4, 5 or more) tag sequences and/or functional sequences.
  • Switch oligos may comprise deoxyribonucleic acids; ribonucleic acids; modified nucleic acids including 2-Aminopurine, 2,6-Diaminopurine (2-Amino-dA), inverted dT, 5-Methyl dC, 2’-deoxyInosine, Super T (5-hydroxybutynl-2’-deoxyuridine), Super G (8-aza- 7-deazaguanosine), locked nucleic acids (LNAs), unlocked nucleic acids (UNAs, e.g., UNA-A, UNA-U, UNA-C, UNA-G), Iso-dG, Iso-dC, T Fluoro bases (e.g., Fluoro C, Fluoro U, Fluoro A, and Fluoro G), or any combination.
  • 2-Aminopurine 2,6-Diaminopurine
  • 2-Amino-dA inverted dT
  • 5-Methyl dC 2’-deoxyI
  • the length of a switch oligo may be at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
  • the length of a switch oligo may be at most about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
  • the macromolecular components e.g., macromolecular constituents of biological particles, such as RNA, DNA, or proteins
  • the macromolecular component contents of individual biological particles can be provided with unique identifiers such that, upon characterization of those macromolecular components they may be attributed as having been derived from the same biological particle or particles.
  • unique identifiers such that, upon characterization of those macromolecular components they may be attributed as having been derived from the same biological particle or particles.
  • the ability to attribute characteristics to individual biological particles or groups of biological particles is provided by the assignment of unique identifiers specifically to an individual biological particle or groups of biological particles.
  • Unique identifiers e.g., in the form of nucleic acid barcodes can be assigned or associated with individual biological particles or populations of biological particles, in order to tag or label the biological particle’s macromolecular components (and as a result, its characteristics) with the unique identifiers. These unique identifiers can then be used to attribute the biological particle’s components and characteristics to an individual biological particle or group of biological particles.
  • this is performed by co-partitioning the individual biological particle or groups of biological particles with the unique identifiers, such as described above (with reference to FIG. 2).
  • the unique identifiers are provided in the form of nucleic acid molecules (e.g., oligonucleotides) that comprise nucleic acid barcode sequences that may be attached to or otherwise associated with the nucleic acid contents of individual biological particle, or to other components of the biological particle, and particularly to fragments of those nucleic acids.
  • the nucleic acid molecules are partitioned such that as between nucleic acid molecules in a given partition, the nucleic acid barcode sequences contained therein are the same, but as between different partitions, the nucleic acid molecule can, and do have differing barcode sequences, or at least represent a large number of different barcode sequences across all of the partitions in a given analysis. In some aspects, only one nucleic acid barcode sequence can be associated with a given partition, although in some cases, two or more different barcode sequences may be present.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Biology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Computational Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
EP21711092.3A 2020-02-13 2021-02-12 Verfahren zur charakterisierung von zellen unter verwendung von genexpression und chromatinzugänglichkeit Pending EP4104177A1 (de)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202062976270P 2020-02-13 2020-02-13
US202062979986P 2020-02-21 2020-02-21
US202063114378P 2020-11-16 2020-11-16
US202063125331P 2020-12-14 2020-12-14
PCT/US2021/018020 WO2021163611A1 (en) 2020-02-13 2021-02-12 Methods for characterizing cells using gene expression and chromatin accessibility

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP4104177A1 true EP4104177A1 (de) 2022-12-21

Family

ID=74867632

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP21711092.3A Pending EP4104177A1 (de) 2020-02-13 2021-02-12 Verfahren zur charakterisierung von zellen unter verwendung von genexpression und chromatinzugänglichkeit

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4104177A1 (de)
CN (1) CN115398547A (de)
AU (1) AU2021221158A1 (de)
WO (1) WO2021163611A1 (de)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112272710A (zh) 2018-05-03 2021-01-26 贝克顿迪金森公司 高通量多组学样品分析

Family Cites Families (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU7516694A (en) 1993-07-30 1995-02-28 Affymax Technologies N.V. Biotinylation of proteins
US9012390B2 (en) 2006-08-07 2015-04-21 Raindance Technologies, Inc. Fluorocarbon emulsion stabilizing surfactants
US20140378345A1 (en) 2012-08-14 2014-12-25 10X Technologies, Inc. Compositions and methods for sample processing
JP6367196B2 (ja) 2012-08-14 2018-08-01 テンエックス・ジェノミクス・インコーポレイテッド マイクロカプセル組成物および方法
EP2999792B1 (de) 2013-05-23 2018-11-14 The Board of Trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University Transposition in natives chromatin für eine persönliche epigenomik
WO2015157567A1 (en) 2014-04-10 2015-10-15 10X Genomics, Inc. Fluidic devices, systems, and methods for encapsulating and partitioning reagents, and applications of same
KR102531677B1 (ko) 2014-06-26 2023-05-10 10엑스 제노믹스, 인크. 개별 세포 또는 세포 개체군으로부터 핵산을 분석하는 방법
EP4397774A3 (de) 2016-10-19 2024-11-06 10X Genomics, Inc. Verfahren zum barcoding von nukleinsäuremolekülen aus einzelnen zellen oder zellpopulationen
US20190177800A1 (en) 2017-12-08 2019-06-13 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods and compositions for labeling cells
US10550429B2 (en) 2016-12-22 2020-02-04 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods and systems for processing polynucleotides
WO2018132518A1 (en) * 2017-01-10 2018-07-19 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Epigenetic analysis of cell therapy and related methods
WO2018140966A1 (en) 2017-01-30 2018-08-02 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods and systems for droplet-based single cell barcoding
US20180312822A1 (en) 2017-04-26 2018-11-01 10X Genomics, Inc. Mmlv reverse transcriptase variants
WO2018218226A1 (en) 2017-05-26 2018-11-29 10X Genomics, Inc. Single cell analysis of transposase accessible chromatin
US10844372B2 (en) 2017-05-26 2020-11-24 10X Genomics, Inc. Single cell analysis of transposase accessible chromatin
US20190064173A1 (en) 2017-08-22 2019-02-28 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of producing droplets including a particle and an analyte
US10590244B2 (en) 2017-10-04 2020-03-17 10X Genomics, Inc. Compositions, methods, and systems for bead formation using improved polymers
EP3625361A1 (de) 2017-11-15 2020-03-25 10X Genomics, Inc. Funktionalisierte gelperlen
WO2019152108A1 (en) * 2018-02-05 2019-08-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for multiplexed measurements in single and ensemble cells
WO2019157529A1 (en) 2018-02-12 2019-08-15 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods characterizing multiple analytes from individual cells or cell populations
WO2019195166A1 (en) 2018-04-06 2019-10-10 10X Genomics, Inc. Systems and methods for quality control in single cell processing
US20210123044A1 (en) * 2018-04-18 2021-04-29 The Regents Of The University Of California Method to Connect Chromatin Accessibility and Transcriptome

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2021221158A1 (en) 2022-09-22
WO2021163611A1 (en) 2021-08-19
CN115398547A (zh) 2022-11-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3749740B1 (de) Systeme und verfahren für multiplexmessungen in einzel- und ensemble-zellen
US12110549B2 (en) Methods and systems for processing polynucleotides
US11161087B2 (en) Methods and compositions for tagging and analyzing samples
US20240124871A1 (en) Drug screening methods
US10480029B2 (en) Methods and systems for processing polynucleotides
EP3545089B1 (de) Verfahren und systeme für eine einzelzellbarcodierung auf tröpfchenbasis
US20240002914A1 (en) Probe-based analysis of nucleic acids and proteins
US20220403375A1 (en) Methods for enriching nucleic acid libraries for target molecules that do not produce artefactual antisense reads
EP4104177A1 (de) Verfahren zur charakterisierung von zellen unter verwendung von genexpression und chromatinzugänglichkeit
US20240271172A1 (en) Methods for processing nucleic acid samples
US20240254474A1 (en) Methods, systems, and kits for dual indexing nucleic acids
US20240254658A1 (en) Methods and systems for analysis
US20240053337A1 (en) Compositions and methods for single cell analyte detection and analysis
US20240254552A1 (en) Probe-based analysis of nucleic acids and proteins

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: UNKNOWN

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE

PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20220912

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

DAV Request for validation of the european patent (deleted)
DAX Request for extension of the european patent (deleted)